WO2019192308A1 - Wireless communication method and device - Google Patents

Wireless communication method and device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019192308A1
WO2019192308A1 PCT/CN2019/078262 CN2019078262W WO2019192308A1 WO 2019192308 A1 WO2019192308 A1 WO 2019192308A1 CN 2019078262 W CN2019078262 W CN 2019078262W WO 2019192308 A1 WO2019192308 A1 WO 2019192308A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
srs
terminal device
power
information
frequency domain
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/078262
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
郭英昊
纪刘榴
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2019192308A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019192308A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/04TPC
    • H04W52/30TPC using constraints in the total amount of available transmission power
    • H04W52/36TPC using constraints in the total amount of available transmission power with a discrete range or set of values, e.g. step size, ramping or offsets
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/04TPC
    • H04W52/30TPC using constraints in the total amount of available transmission power
    • H04W52/36TPC using constraints in the total amount of available transmission power with a discrete range or set of values, e.g. step size, ramping or offsets
    • H04W52/365Power headroom reporting
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications and, more particularly, to a method and apparatus for wireless communication.
  • a terminal device sends a Power Headroom Report (PHR) to an evolved base station (eNB).
  • PHR is a Media Access Control (MAC) Control Element (CE) that contains Power Headroom (PH) information.
  • the PHR can provide the eNB with information for power control and scheduling.
  • the eNB may select an appropriate modulation and coding scheme (MCS), resource size, power control parameters, and the like according to the PHR for the uplink transmission of the terminal device.
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • the terminal device may report the PH of the SRS of the serving cell. It is called Type 3 PH in LTE; otherwise, the terminal device reports the PH of the Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH), which is called Type 1 PH in LTE, or if the terminal device is configured with physical in the serving cell.
  • PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
  • the terminal device reports Type1 PH and Type 2 PH, where Type 2 PH is the PH of PUSCH and PUCCH.
  • 5G 5th Generation
  • NR New Radio
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and apparatus for wireless communication to implement more accurate power headroom information reporting, better power control, and resource allocation.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a method for wireless communication.
  • the method includes: the terminal device obtains first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure at least one listening reference signal SRS of the frequency domain resource.
  • the terminal device determines the first SRS on the first time period of the frequency domain resource according to the first configuration information.
  • the first SRS includes one or more of the at least one SRS; the terminal device determines power headroom information of the frequency domain resource according to the first SRS.
  • the terminal device sends power headroom information of the frequency domain resource on the first time period.
  • the terminal device can report more accurate power headroom information, thereby facilitating the access network device to perform better power control or resource allocation.
  • the terminal device determines power headroom information of the frequency domain resource according to the first SRS and the physical channel on the first time period of the frequency domain resource.
  • the terminal device can report the SRS and the physical channel power headroom information, thereby facilitating independent power control of the SRS and the physical channel by the access network device.
  • the terminal device determines the first SRS according to the manner in which the at least one SRS is sent.
  • the terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, signaling overhead can be reduced.
  • the terminal device determines the first SRS according to the function of the at least one SRS.
  • the terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, signaling overhead can be reduced.
  • the terminal device determines the first SRS according to the time domain position of the at least one SRS in the first time period.
  • the terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to be consistent with the first SRS. At the same time, signaling overhead can be reduced.
  • the terminal device determines the first SRS according to the identification information of the at least one SRS.
  • the terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, signaling overhead can be reduced.
  • the first SRS includes all of the SRSs in at least one SRS.
  • the terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, more detailed power headroom information can be reported.
  • the terminal device obtains second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used to indicate that the terminal device separately receives the power control command of the physical channel on the frequency domain resource and the SRS on the frequency domain resource, or And the terminal device respectively picks up the power control command of the physical channel and the SRS, or the indication information that the terminal device uses to transmit the second maximum transmit power of the SRS and the second maximum transmit power on the physical channel.
  • the indication information that the second maximum transmit power of the terminal device for transmitting the SRS and the second maximum transmit power for the physical channel are different includes the second maximum transmit power of the terminal device for transmitting the SRS. And a second maximum transmit power for use on the physical channel, wherein the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS is different than the second maximum transmit power for the physical channel.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a method for wireless communication.
  • the method includes: the access network device sends first configuration information to the terminal device, where the first configuration information is used to configure at least one listening reference signal (SRS) of the frequency domain resource; and the first time when the access network device determines the frequency domain resource a first SRS on the segment, the first SRS includes one or more of the at least one SRS; the access network device receives power headroom information of the frequency domain resource sent by the terminal device on the first time period, where The power headroom information is determined based on the first SRS.
  • the access network device can obtain more accurate power headroom information, thereby facilitating access network devices for better power control or resource allocation.
  • the power headroom information is determined based on the physical channel on the first time period of the first SRS and the frequency domain resource.
  • the access network device can obtain SRS and physical channel power headroom information to better implement independent power control of the SRS and the physical channel.
  • the access network device determines the first SRS according to the manner in which the at least one SRS is sent.
  • the terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS.
  • signaling overhead can be reduced.
  • the access network device determines the first SRS based on the functionality of the at least one SRS.
  • the terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, signaling overhead can be reduced.
  • the access network device determines the first SRS according to the time domain location of the at least one SRS in the first time period.
  • the terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS.
  • signaling overhead can be reduced.
  • the access network device determines the first SRS according to the identification information of the at least one SRS.
  • the terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, signaling overhead can be reduced.
  • the first SRS includes all of the SRSs in at least one SRS.
  • the terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, more detailed power headroom information can be reported.
  • the access network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to indicate that the access network device separately sends the physical channel and the frequency domain resource on the frequency domain resource.
  • the power control command of the SRS, or the power control command sent by the access network device to the physical channel and the SRS, or the second maximum transmit power used by the terminal device to transmit the SRS and the second maximum transmit power used on the physical channel Different indication information, or indication information that the terminal device uses the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS on the frequency domain resource and the second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource is different. .
  • the indication information that the second maximum transmit power of the terminal device for transmitting the SRS and the second maximum transmit power for the physical channel are different includes the second maximum transmit power of the terminal device for transmitting the SRS. And a second maximum transmit power for use on the physical channel, wherein the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS is different than the second maximum transmit power for the physical channel.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication apparatus.
  • the apparatus includes a processor and a transceiver coupled to the processor, a processor configured to obtain first configuration information, the first configuration information configured to configure at least one listening reference signal (SRS) of the frequency domain resource, and a processor, And a method for determining, according to the first configuration information, a first SRS on a first time period of a frequency domain resource, where the first SRS includes one or more of the at least one SRS;
  • the first SRS determines power headroom information of a frequency domain resource;
  • the transceiver is configured to send power headroom information on the first time period.
  • the processor is further configured to determine, according to the first SRS and the physical channel on the first time period of the frequency domain resource, power headroom information of the frequency domain resource.
  • the processor is configured to determine the first SRS according to a sending manner of the at least one SRS.
  • the processor is configured to determine the first SRS according to the function of the at least one SRS.
  • the processor is configured to determine the first SRS according to the time domain location of the at least one SRS in the first time period.
  • the processor is configured to determine the first SRS according to the identifier information of the at least one SRS.
  • the first SRS includes all of the SRSs in at least one SRS.
  • the processor is configured to obtain second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used to indicate that the device separately receives a power control command of the physical channel and the SRS, or the device separately receives the frequency domain resource.
  • the indication information that the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS is different from the second maximum transmit power for the physical channel includes a second maximum transmit power that the apparatus uses to transmit the SRS and is used for A second maximum transmit power on the physical channel, wherein the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS is different than the second maximum transmit power for transmitting on the physical channel.
  • the indication information for transmitting the second maximum transmit power of the SRS on the frequency domain resource and the second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource comprises means for Transmitting a second maximum transmit power of the SRS on the frequency domain resource and a second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource, wherein the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS on the frequency domain resource is used The second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource is different.
  • the physical channel includes a physical uplink shared channel and/or a physical uplink control channel.
  • the first configuration information includes at least one of the following: indication information indicating a manner of sending the at least one SRS, where the sending manner includes: An aperiodic transmission mode, or a semi-static transmission mode, or a periodic transmission mode; indication information for indicating a function of the at least one SRS, wherein the function includes: for codebook-based transmission And/or for non-codebook based transmission, and/or for SRS handover, and/or for beam management; time domain location information of said at least one SRS; identification information of said at least one SRS; The identification information of the frequency domain resource.
  • the power headroom information includes: one or more first power headroom information, wherein the first power headroom information is a terminal device in a frequency domain resource.
  • the terminal device can report power headroom information of each SRS in multiple SRSs.
  • the power headroom information includes: one or more second power headroom information, wherein the second power headroom information is a terminal device in a frequency domain resource. a difference between a first maximum transmit power and a power of the terminal device on the first physical channel, and when the physical channel includes multiple channels, the first physical channel is one of a plurality of channels, and when the physical channel includes a channel, the first A physical channel is the channel.
  • the terminal device can report power headroom information of each channel included in the physical channel.
  • the power headroom information includes: third power headroom information, wherein the third power headroom information is the first of the terminal equipment in the frequency domain resource.
  • the embodiment of the present invention can reduce the signaling overhead of reporting the power headroom information of the SRS.
  • the power headroom information includes: fourth power headroom information, wherein the fourth power headroom information is a first maximum transmission of the terminal equipment in the frequency domain resource.
  • the embodiment of the invention can reduce the signaling overhead of reporting the power headroom information of the physical channel.
  • the power headroom information includes: a fifth power headroom information, wherein the fifth power headroom information is a first maximum transmission of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource.
  • the difference between the power and the first transmit power, wherein the first transmit power is the sum of the power of the first SRS transmitted by the terminal device and the power on the physical channel.
  • the embodiment of the present invention can reduce the signaling overhead of reporting the power headroom information of the SRS and the physical channel.
  • the power headroom information may further include: one or more first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one SRS included in the first SRS.
  • the identification information of one SRS the first indication information is associated with the first power headroom information.
  • the power headroom information may further include: a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource; and/or the terminal device sends a first maximum transmit power of the first SRS; and/or a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the physical channel; and/or a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device.
  • the access network device can learn the first maximum transmit power used by the terminal device to determine the power headroom information, thereby facilitating power control or resource allocation.
  • the first SRS of the frequency domain resource included in the power headroom information includes the same maximum transmit power
  • only one of the power headroom information is included.
  • a first maximum transmit power and the one first maximum transmit power is associated with the first SRS.
  • the signaling overhead of reporting the first maximum power of the first SRS may be saved.
  • the power The remaining information may include only one first maximum transmit power, and the one first maximum transmit power is associated with the first SRS and the physical channel. The signaling overhead of reporting the first maximum power of the first SRS and the physical channel can be saved.
  • the power headroom information may further include: second indication information, used to indicate the identifier information of the frequency domain resource. By reporting the identification information of the frequency domain resource, the access network device can know which power resource information of the frequency domain resource is reported by the terminal.
  • the frequency domain resources may be: a serving cell, a primary serving cell, a secondary serving cell, a component carrier (CC), and a supplemental uplink (Supplementary Uplink). , SUL), or BandWidth Parts (BWP).
  • the first time period may be a subframe, a time slot, a mini time slot, a symbol, and a transmission time interval.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a computer readable storage medium for storing instructions that, when executed on a memory, cause the processor to perform the above aspects or possible design methods.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication apparatus.
  • the communication device includes a processor and a memory for storing instructions, and a processor for reading and executing instructions in the memory such that the communication device performs the methods of the various aspects or possible designs described above.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a mobile communication system to which an embodiment of the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flow chart of an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a time domain location of transmitting an SRS according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the power headroom information content 1 of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the power headroom information content 2 of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the power headroom information content 3 of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the power headroom information content 4 of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the power headroom information content 5 of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the power headroom information content 6 of the embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • NR orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • This application describes a 5G system as an example, but is not limited to a 5G system.
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present invention are equally applicable to similar technical problems, as the new service scenario occurs and the network architecture evolves.
  • FIG. 1 shows an example of a communication system to which the embodiment of the present invention is applied, which includes an access network device 101 and terminal devices 111 to 112 (for simplicity, only two terminal devices are shown in FIG. But does not mean that there can only be 2 terminal devices. In fact, there can be any number of terminal devices), and serving cells 121-122 (for the sake of simplicity, only two serving cells are shown in Figure 1, but It does not mean that there can only be 2 service cells. In fact, there can be any number of service cells).
  • the access network device 101 provides services for the terminal devices 111-112 through one or more of the serving cells 121-122, that is, the terminal devices 111-112 pass through one or more of the serving cells 121-122 and the access network device 101. Communicate. It should be understood that FIG.
  • the access network device 101 communicates with the terminal device 111 through the serving cell 121, and the access network device 101 communicates with the terminal device 112 through the serving cell 121 and the serving cell 122.
  • the access network device 101 of the serving cell 121 and the serving cell 122 may correspond to the same or two different physical sites (e.g., macro base station and micro base station), and different stations may communicate.
  • the terminal devices 111 to 112 may be 1) a terminal device having data to be transmitted; 2) a terminal device that needs to retransmit data; 3) a terminal device having no uplink data, and the like.
  • an access network device (for example, the access network device 101) is a device deployed in a wireless access network to provide a wireless communication function for the terminal device.
  • the access network device may include various forms of radio access network devices, macro base stations, micro base stations (also referred to as small stations), relay stations, access points, and the like.
  • the access network device may be a Base Transceiver Station (BTS) in GSM or CDMA, or may be a base station (NodeB, NB) in WCDMA, an evolved base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or e- in LTE or eLTE).
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • NodeB, NB base station
  • Evolutional Node B, eNB or e- in LTE or eLTE evolved base station
  • NodeB base station gNB ((next) generation NodeB) in 5G (fifth generation), base station in future mobile communication system, access node in WiFi system or roadside unit (RSU) in V2X communication Etc., or a chip or system on chip (SOC) inside the access network device.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technologies and specific device modes adopted by the access network device.
  • an access network device is sometimes also referred to as a base station, or a wireless access device.
  • the terminal device may also be referred to as a user equipment (User Equipment, UE), a mobile station (Mobile Station, MS), a mobile terminal (MT), etc., and the terminal device may be wirelessly accessed.
  • a Radio Access Network (RAN) communicates with one or more core networks.
  • the terminal device can be a device with wireless transceiving function, which can be deployed on land, indoors or outdoors, handheld or on-board; it can also be deployed on the water surface (such as a ship, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as airplanes, balloons). And satellites, etc.).
  • the terminal device may be a mobile phone, a tablet (Pad), a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, and industrial control ( Wireless terminal in industrial control, wireless terminal in self driving, wireless terminal in remote medical, wireless terminal in smart grid, transportation safety A wireless terminal, a wireless terminal in a smart city, a wireless terminal in a smart home, and the like.
  • a terminal device is sometimes referred to as a UE.
  • the access network device and the terminal device and the terminal device and the terminal device and the terminal device can communicate through a spectrum below 6G megahertz (GHz), or can communicate through a spectrum above 6 GHz. It is possible to simultaneously use a spectrum below 6 GHz and a spectrum above 6 GHz for communication.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the spectrum resources used between the radio access network device and the terminal device.
  • the access network device and the terminal device and between the terminal device and the terminal device can communicate through a licensed spectrum, or can communicate through an unlicensed spectrum, or can simultaneously pass the licensed spectrum and the license-free.
  • the spectrum communicates.
  • the serving cells 121-122 may be serving cells based on a licensed spectrum.
  • the access network device 101 and the terminal devices 111-112 may perform data communication on the licensed spectrum, in the serving cells 121-122. Some or all of the serving cells may be serving cells based on an unlicensed spectrum. At this time, the access network device 101 and the terminal devices 111 to 112 may perform data communication on an unlicensed spectrum.
  • the above scenario of using the licensed spectrum or the unlicensed spectrum may be a single-cell communication system, a carrier aggregation (CA) communication system, a Mass Carrier Aggregation (MCA) communication system, and dual connectivity (Dual Connectivity).
  • DC communication system
  • MC Multiple Connectivity
  • CoMP coordinated multiple point transmission
  • NR-NRDC Multi-RAT (Radio Access Network) DC (MRDC)
  • MRDC Multi-RAT (Radio Access Network) DC
  • the above scenario may also be a LAA, eLAA, FeLAA system, 5G communication system in an LTE system, or a communication system using an unlicensed spectrum (eg, 5150-5350 MHz) in a future communication system, working independently in an unlicensed spectrum (unlicensed) Spectrum) systems such as the MultiFire system.
  • one or more of the serving cells 121-122 may be replaced by a primary serving cell, a secondary serving cell, a component carrier (CC), a supplementary uplink (SUL), or BandWidth Parts (BWP).
  • CC component carrier
  • SUL supplementary uplink
  • BWP BandWidth Parts
  • SUL The use of spectrum in NR will extend to higher frequency bands, such as C-band and higher.
  • data transmission in the high frequency band has a large path attenuation and poor coverage.
  • the access network equipment has a large transmission power, a strong RF device and more antennas, the attenuation problem of the high frequency data channel can be alleviated.
  • the design of SUL is proposed in NR, which is to supplement the low frequency link to improve the reliability and coverage of the uplink based on the original high frequency link.
  • BWP In order to adapt to the high bandwidth of high frequency transmission, high frequency, different air interface formats and higher terminal equipment capability requirements, the concept of BWP is introduced in NR.
  • the main application scenarios include at least one of the following scenarios: (1) Supporting the smaller bandwidth capability of the terminal equipment; (2) by changing the energy consumption of the terminal equipment with less bandwidth; (3) supporting the frequency division multiplexing of different basic parameter sets (numerology); (4) supporting the discontinuous spectrum; 5) Support for forward compatibility.
  • FIG. 2 shows a wireless communication device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the wireless communication device can be used as the terminal devices 111-112 or applied to the devices in the terminal devices 111-112.
  • the wireless communication device shown in FIG. 2 will be described as an example of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device is capable of performing the method provided by the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the terminal device may be any one of the two terminal devices 111 to 112.
  • the terminal device includes a transceiver 201, a processor 204 for implementing a wireless communication function, and a memory 203.
  • the transceiver 201 can be used to support the transmission and reception of information between the terminal devices 111-112 and the access network device 101.
  • the downlink radio frequency signal from the access network device is received via the antenna, coordinated by the transceiver 201, and the baseband signal is extracted and output to the processor 204 for processing to recover the service data sent by the access network device. And / or signaling information.
  • the baseband signal carrying the traffic data and/or signaling messages to be transmitted to the access network device is modulated by the transceiver 201 to generate an uplink radio frequency signal and transmitted to the access via the antenna.
  • the transceiver 201 can also be used to support the transmission and reception of information between the terminal devices 111-112.
  • the transceiver 201 can include independent receiver and transmitter circuits, or can be integrated in the same circuit to implement transceiving functions.
  • Processor 204 can be a modem processor.
  • Processor 204 can include a baseband processor (BBP) that processes the digitized received signal to extract information or data bits carried in the signal.
  • BBP baseband processor
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ICs integrated circuits
  • processor 204 can include an encoder 2041, a modulator 2042, a decoder 2043, and a demodulator 2044.
  • the encoder 2041 is for encoding the signal to be transmitted.
  • the encoder 2041 can be configured to receive traffic data and/or signaling messages to be transmitted on the uplink (or on the side link) and process the traffic data and signaling messages (eg, format, encode, Or intertwined, etc.).
  • Modulator 2042 is used to modulate the output signal of encoder 2041.
  • the modulator can perform symbol mapping and/or modulation processing on the encoder's output signals (data and/or signaling) and provide output samples.
  • a demodulator 2044 is used to demodulate the input signal. For example, demodulator 2044 processes the input samples and provides symbol estimates.
  • the decoder 2043 is configured to decode the demodulated input signal. For example, the decoder 2043 de-interleaves, and/or decodes the demodulated input signal and outputs the decoded signal (data and/or signaling).
  • the processor 204 receives digitized data representative of voice, data or control information and processes the digitized data for transmission.
  • the processor 204 can support one or more of a plurality of wireless communication protocols of a plurality of communication systems, such as a Long Term Evolution (LTE) communication system, a New Radio (NR), and a universal mobile communication system ( Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) and the like.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • NR New Radio
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • HSPA High Speed Packet Access
  • one or more memories may also be included in the processor 204.
  • the memory 203 is used to store program codes (sometimes referred to as programs, instructions, software, etc.) and/or data for supporting communication of the terminal device.
  • program codes sometimes referred to as programs, instructions, software, etc.
  • the memory 203 may include one or more storage units, for example, may be the storage unit inside the processor 204 or the application processor 202, or may be an external storage unit independent of the processor 204 or the application processor 202. Or it may be a component that includes a memory unit internal to processor 204 or application processor 202 and an external memory unit that is separate from processor 204 or application processor 202.
  • the terminal device may also include an application processor 202 for generating digitized data representative of voice, data or control information as described above.
  • Processor 204 and application processor 202 may be integrated into one processor chip.
  • FIG. 3 shows a wireless communication device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the wireless communication device can be used as an access network device 101 or a device applied to the access network device 101.
  • the following is an example in which the wireless communication device shown in FIG. 2 is an access network device.
  • the access network device is capable of performing the method provided by the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the access network device includes a transceiver 302, a controller or processor 301 (hereinafter, exemplified by processor 301) and a memory 303.
  • the transceiver 302 can be used to support the transmission and reception of information between the access network device 101 and the terminal devices 111-112.
  • the uplink radio frequency signal from the terminal device is received via the antenna, coordinated by the transceiver 302, and the baseband signal is extracted and output to the processor 301 for processing to recover the service data and/or information sent by the terminal device. Order information.
  • the baseband signal carrying the service data and/or signaling message to be transmitted to the terminal device is modulated by the processor 301 to generate an uplink radio frequency signal and transmitted to the access network device via the antenna.
  • the transceiver 302 can also be used to support the transmission and reception of information between the terminal devices 111-112.
  • the transceiver 302 can include separate receiver and transmitter circuits, or can be integrated in the same circuit for transceiving functions.
  • Processor 301 is also sometimes referred to as a modem processor.
  • Processor 301 can include a baseband processor (BBP) (not shown in FIG. 3) that processes the digitized received signal to extract information or data bits conveyed in the signal.
  • BBP baseband processor
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ICs integrated circuits
  • Memory 303 is used to store program code (sometimes referred to as programs, instructions, software, etc.) and/or data for supporting communication by the access network device.
  • the memory 303 may include one or more storage units, for example, may be a storage unit inside the processor 301, or may be an external storage unit independent of the processor 301, or may also include an internal processor 301.
  • the storage unit and the components of the external storage unit independent of the processor 301 may include one or more storage units, for example, may be a storage unit inside the processor 301, or may be an external storage unit independent of the processor 301, or may also include an internal processor 301.
  • the storage unit and the components of the external storage unit independent of the processor 301 may be a storage unit inside the processor 301, or may be an external storage unit independent of the processor 301, or may also include an internal processor 301.
  • the storage unit and the components of the external storage unit independent of the processor 301 may include one or more storage units, for example, may be a storage unit inside the processor 301, or may be an external storage unit independent of the processor 301, or may also include an internal processor 301.
  • the access network device 101 can also include a communication unit 304 for supporting the access network device 101 to communicate with other network entities. For example, it is used to support the access network device 101 to communicate with a network device or the like of the core network.
  • the access network device 101 may further include a bus.
  • the transceiver 302, the memory 303, and the communication unit 304 can be connected to the processor 301 through a bus.
  • the bus can be a Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus or an Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) bus.
  • PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect
  • EISA Extended Industry Standard Architecture
  • the bus may include an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like.
  • the processor 204 and the processor 301 may be the same type of processor or different types of processors. For example, it can be implemented in a central processing unit (CPU), a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), and a field programmable gate array ( Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, other integrated circuit, or any combination thereof.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • the processor 204 and the processor 301 can implement or perform various exemplary logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with the present disclosure.
  • the processor 204 and the processor 301 may also be a combination of computing function devices, for example, including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, or a system-on-a-chip (SOC), etc. Wait.
  • the PHR is a Media Access Control (MAC) Control Element (CE) composed of at least one Power Headroom (PH).
  • MAC Media Access Control
  • CE Power Headroom
  • each PH corresponds to an activated serving cell (Activated Serving Cell).
  • Activated Serving Cell Activated Serving Cell
  • PH represents the difference between the maximum transmit power allowed by the terminal device on one serving cell and the estimated transmit power (Estimated Transmission Power) of the terminal device on the serving cell.
  • the terminal device reports the PH to the access network device to notify the terminal device of the power headroom information, so that the access network device performs reasonable resource allocation and/or power control for the terminal device.
  • Type1 indicates the difference between the maximum transmit power allowed by the terminal device on a serving cell and the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) power of the terminal device. For example, when calculating the PH of the serving cell c subframe i, only the power of the PUSCH is considered, where c denotes the number of the serving cell and i denotes the number of the subframe. It should be noted that the PUSCH is a physical channel, and the corresponding transport channel is an uplink shared channel (UL-SCH). Therefore, the Type 1 PH may also represent the difference between the maximum transmit power allowed by the terminal device on one serving cell and the power of the terminal device transmitting the UL-SCH on the serving cell.
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • the power of the PUSCH transmitted by the terminal device is the estimated transmit power (the estimated transmit power) of the terminal device, and the estimated transmit power may be the same as the actual transmit power of the PUSCH, and may also be sent with the actual transmission.
  • the power of the PUSCH is different.
  • Type 2 indicates the difference between the maximum transmit power allowed by the terminal device on a serving cell and the power of the terminal device to transmit the PUSCH and the Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) on the serving cell. For example, when calculating the PH of the serving cell c subframe i, consider the power of transmitting the PUSCH and the PUCCH.
  • the Type 2 PH may also indicate the difference between the maximum transmit power allowed by the terminal device on one serving cell and the power of the terminal device transmitting the UL-SCH and PUCCH on the serving cell.
  • the power of the terminal device to transmit the PUSCH and the PUCCH is the transmit power estimated by the terminal device for transmitting the PUSCH and the PUCCH
  • the power of the terminal device for transmitting the SRS is the transmit power estimated by the terminal device for transmitting the SRS.
  • Type 3 indicates the difference between the maximum transmit power allowed by the terminal device on a serving cell and the power of the terminal device to transmit a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) on the serving cell.
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • the terminal device may The PH of the SRS of the serving cell is reported by the Type3 PH.
  • the terminal device can send both the PUSCH and the SRS on the primary cell (PCell) or the SCell, the terminal device can only send the Type1 PH.
  • the terminal device can transmit both the PUSCH and the PUCCH on the PCell or the SCell, and the SRS can be sent, the terminal device can only send the Type1 PH and the Type2 PH.
  • the sum of the estimated transmit powers of the terminal devices on multiple serving cells may exceed the maximum transmit power of the terminal device, so the terminal device may also adjust the estimated transmit power.
  • the transmission power is made to meet the requirements of the maximum transmission power of the terminal device.
  • the power control for transmitting the SRS and the power control for transmitting the PUSCH are mutually bound (or associated), and the existing PH technology solution can support the transmission.
  • the SRS and the PUSCH transmit power control for binding.
  • the power control for transmitting the SRS and the power control for transmitting the PUSCH are independent of each other.
  • the access network device cannot mutually convert the power headroom of the SRS and the power headroom of the PUSCH to each other relatively accurately. Therefore, power control of the SRS and the PUSCH cannot be performed separately. Thereby, the accuracy of power control and resource allocation performance are affected.
  • the present invention provides a wireless communication method.
  • the access network device configures at least one SRS on the serving cell for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines power headroom information of the serving cell according to part or all of the at least one SRS and one or more physical channels, and sends the power headroom information to the access network device.
  • the access network device obtains more accurate power headroom information of the terminal device in the serving cell, thereby improving power control accuracy and resource allocation performance.
  • the serving cell may also be a primary cell (PCell), a secondary cell (SCell), and a primary secondary cell (PScell).
  • CC Component Carrier
  • SUL Supplementary Uplink
  • BWP BandWidth Parts
  • the power headroom PH of a serving cell can also be replaced by the PH of a BWP, or replaced by the PH of a CC, or replaced by the PH of a SUL.
  • the maximum transmit power allowed on the serving cell is the maximum transmit power allowed on the serving cell determined by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device is determined according to at least one of a maximum transmit power capability of the terminal device, a maximum transmit power of the serving cell, and a power backoff notified by the access network device.
  • the maximum transmit power capability of the terminal is 23 decibels milliwatts (dBm)
  • the maximum transmit power of a serving cell notified by the access network device is 20 dBm
  • the power backoff is 2 dB
  • the transmit power is equal to 18 dBm.
  • the maximum transmit power determined by the terminal device on the serving cell is also referred to as the first maximum transmit power on the serving cell.
  • the maximum transmit power allowed on the BWP determined by the terminal device is also referred to as the first maximum transmit power on the BWP.
  • the maximum transmit power allowed on the SUL determined by the terminal device is also referred to as the first maximum transmit power on the SUL, and the maximum transmit power allowed by the terminal device on one frequency domain resource is also referred to as being on the frequency domain resource.
  • the maximum transmit power notified by the access network device is also referred to as the second maximum transmit power.
  • the maximum transmit power of the terminal device notified by the access network device in one serving cell is also referred to as the second maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the serving cell.
  • the maximum transmit power of the terminal device notified by the access network device at one BWP is also referred to as the second maximum transmit power of the terminal device at the BWP.
  • the maximum transmit power of the terminal device notified by the access network device in one frequency domain resource is also referred to as the second maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource.
  • the PH of one BWP represents the difference between the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on one BWP and the estimated transmit power (Estimated Transmission Power) of the terminal device on the BWP.
  • the PH of one CC represents the difference between the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on one CC and the estimated transmit power (Estimated Transmission Power) of the terminal device on the CC.
  • the PH of one SUL represents the difference between the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on one SUL and the estimated transmit power (Estimated Transmission Power) of the terminal device on the SUL.
  • the PH of a frequency domain resource indicates the difference between the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on one frequency domain resource and the estimated transmit power (Estimated Transmission Power) of the terminal device on the frequency domain resource.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a wireless communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the terminal device in each embodiment of the present invention may be any one of the terminal devices 111 to 112 in FIG.
  • Step S101 The access network device sends the first configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the first configuration information from the access network device.
  • the first configuration information is used to configure at least one Listening Reference Signal (SRS) of the frequency domain resource.
  • SRS Listening Reference Signal
  • the at least one SRS may be replaced with at least one set of SRSs, wherein each set of SRSs includes at least one SRS.
  • the operations of the at least one SRS such as determining the first SRS, determining the power headroom information, reporting the power headroom information, and the like, are all in units of a set of SRSs.
  • the frequency domain resource may be: a serving cell (Serving Cell), a primary serving cell (Primary Cell, PCell), a secondary serving cell (Secondary Cell, SCell), and a primary secondary cell (Primary Secondary Cell, PScell). ) Component Carrier (CC), Supplementary Uplink (SUL), or BandWidth Parts (BWP).
  • the frequency domain resource may be a frequency domain resource of the licensed spectrum or a frequency domain resource of the unlicensed spectrum. The invention is not limited.
  • the terminal device can send the configured at least one SRS on the configured frequency domain resource. Further terminal devices may also transmit PUSCH (ie, transmit information on the PUSCH) and/or PUCCH (ie, transmit information on the PUCCH) on the configured frequency domain resources.
  • the first configuration information includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal device sends the SRS to the access network device only after receiving the command of the access network device.
  • the access network device notifies the UE to send an SRS once through a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH).
  • the primary SRS may include multiple SRS resources and may occupy multiple OFDM symbols.
  • the sending mode of the SRS is a semi-static transmission mode
  • the terminal device periodically sends an access command to the access network device according to a pre-configured period after receiving an activation command of the access network device, for example, a MAC Control Element (MACCE).
  • MACCE MAC Control Element
  • the SRS is sent, and when the terminal device receives the deactivation (or release) command of the access network device, for example, the MACCE, stops sending the SRS to the access network device.
  • the SRS may be transmitted multiple times during activation and deactivation. If the sending mode of the SRS is a periodic sending mode, the terminal device periodically sends the SRS to the access network device according to the pre-configured period.
  • the first configuration information may further carry the periodic information.
  • the period length is 10 milliseconds, or 2 subframes, or 5 slots, or 5 OFDM symbols, and the like.
  • indication information for indicating a function of the at least one SRS, wherein the function comprises: for codebook based transmission, and/or for non-codebook based transmission, and/or Switching on SRS, and/or for beam management.
  • the time domain location information may represent an absolute time domain location, for example, indicating which radio frame or cells, or subframes, or orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (or orthogonal frequency division multiplexing) the resources of each SRS in the at least one SRS are located. Frequency division multiplexing, OFDM) symbols, and the like.
  • the time domain location information may also represent relative time domain locations, such as radio frame offset, or subframe offset, or slot offset, or orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM). Symbol offset, etc.
  • the terminal device can determine the absolute time domain location based on the relative time domain location.
  • Information 14 identification information of the at least one SRS
  • the access network device may configure multiple SRSs on one frequency domain resource for the terminal device, that is, configure multiple sets of SRS resources, different SRSs may have different transmission modes, and different SRSs may have different functions.
  • the first configuration information carries identification information of at least one SRS. Different SRSs have different identification information.
  • the identification information may be explicit identification information, for example, the identification information may be an identity or an index.
  • the identifier information may be implicit identifier information.
  • the identifier information of one SRS is determined according to the location of the SRS in the at least one SRS in the first configuration information, and the identifier information of the first SRS is 0.
  • the identification information of the two SRSs is 1 or the like.
  • the identifier information of the SRS may also be a resource identifier occupied by the SRS, such as a resource ID.
  • the identifier information of the SRS may also be the identifier of the resource group where the resource occupied by the SRS is located.
  • the identifier information of the SRS may also be an identifier of a time domain resource occupied by the SRS, or a frequency domain resource identifier, or a code domain resource identifier, or an airspace resource identifier.
  • the identification information of the SRS may be identification information of the SRS group. No longer.
  • the access network device when the access network device configures only one SRS for the terminal device in a frequency domain resource, the first configuration information may not carry the identifier information of the SRS.
  • the terminal device and the access network device may represent the SRS according to a predefined identifier.
  • Information 15 Identification information of the frequency domain resource.
  • the access network device can configure multiple frequency domain resources for the terminal device. For example, in a scenario such as CA, LAA, DC, LTE, and NRDC, the access network device configures five frequency domain resources for the terminal device.
  • the first configuration information carries the identification information of the frequency domain resource. Different frequency domain resources may have different identification information.
  • the identifier information may be explicit identifier information.
  • the identifier information may be a cell identity (Cell Identity) or a cell index (Cell Index).
  • the frequency domain resource is a BWP
  • the identifier information is used. Can be BWP logo, or BWP index.
  • the identifier information may be an implicit identifier information.
  • the identifier information of a frequency domain resource is determined according to a location of the frequency domain resource in multiple frequency domain resources included in the first configuration information, and the first frequency is determined.
  • the identifier information of the domain resource is 0, and the identifier information of the second frequency domain resource is 1.
  • the identification information of a frequency domain resource is determined according to an order in which the frequency of the frequency domain resource in the plurality of frequency domain resources included in the first configuration information is from low to high (or high to low). The invention is not limited.
  • the first configuration information may not carry the identifier information of the frequency domain resource.
  • the above information 11 to 15 may be fixed or pre-configured in the protocol, and another part is carried in the first configuration information. For example, if the information 11 is fixed to the periodic transmission mode in the protocol, or the information 11 is pre-configured to be a periodic transmission mode, the information 11 may not be carried in the first configuration information. Other information is similar to this and will not be described again.
  • the terminal device may receive the first configuration information or receive the first information by using a Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer message, a Media Access Control (MAC) layer message, or a physical layer message.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC Media Access Control
  • the RRC layer message may be a system broadcast message, or the RRC layer message may be a dedicated RRC message. The invention is not limited.
  • the information 11 to the information 15 in the first configuration information may be in the same message or in different messages.
  • information 11 to 13 are in RRC reconfiguration message 1
  • information 14 to 15 are in RRC reconfiguration message 2.
  • the invention is not limited.
  • the transceiver 302 in the access network device may be configured to send the first configuration information, or the processor 301 in the access network device controls the transceiver 302 to send the first configuration information.
  • the transceiver 204 in the terminal device can be configured to receive the first configuration information, or the processor 201 in the terminal device controls the transceiver 204 to receive the first configuration information.
  • Step S102 The access network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the second configuration information from the access network device.
  • the second configuration information can be used to indicate any of the following information:
  • the access network device separately transmits a physical channel and a power control command (TPC) of the SRS to the terminal device; correspondingly, the terminal device separately receives the power control command and the SRS of the physical channel sent by the access network device Power control commands.
  • TPC power control command
  • the physical channel comprises a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH.
  • the access network device separately sends a power control command of the PUSCH (or PUCCH) and a power control command of the SRS to the terminal device, and the terminal device adjusts the PUSCH (or PUCCH) according to the power control command of the received PUSCH (or PUCCH). Transmit power; adjust the transmit power of the SRS according to the power control command of the received SRS.
  • the access network device separately sends a power control command of the PUSCH, a power control command of the PUCCH, and a power control command of the SRS to the terminal device.
  • the power control command of the access network device to the terminal device PUSCH through one or more downlink control information, the power control command of the PUCCH, and the power control command of the SRS.
  • the information 21 indicates that the access network device sends the physical channel and the SRS power control command to the terminal device respectively on all the multiple frequency domain resources.
  • the advantage of using the information 21 is that when the access network device configures multiple frequency domain resources for the terminal device, the signaling overhead of the second configuration information can be effectively saved.
  • the access network device separately sends the SRS power control command on the physical channel and the frequency domain resource on the frequency domain resource to the terminal device; correspondingly, the terminal device separately receives the physical on the frequency domain resource sent by the access network device Power control commands for the channel and power control commands for the SRS.
  • the information 22 is only applied to specific frequency domain resources.
  • the access network device configures three frequency domain resources (represented as frequency domain resource 1, frequency domain resource 2, and frequency domain resource 3) for the terminal device, and the information 22 can be applied only to the frequency domain resource 1 and the frequency domain resource. 3.
  • the information 22 is more flexible, but the signaling overhead is relatively large.
  • the access network device configures a frequency domain resource for the terminal device
  • the information 21 and the information 22 are the same.
  • the second maximum transmit power used by the terminal device to transmit the SRS is different from the second maximum transmit power used on the physical channel.
  • the information 23 may also be a second maximum transmit power used by the terminal device to transmit the SRS and a second maximum transmit power for transmitting on the physical channel, wherein the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS is used for the physical channel
  • the second maximum transmit power is different.
  • the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS is 20 dBm
  • the second maximum transmit power for the PUSCH and or PUCCH is 23 dBm.
  • the second maximum transmit power used by the terminal device to transmit the SRS on the frequency domain resource and the second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource are different.
  • the information 24 may also be a second maximum transmit power used by the terminal device to transmit the SRS on the frequency domain resource and a second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource, wherein the resource is used in the frequency domain.
  • the second maximum transmit power of the upper transmit SRS is different than the second maximum transmit power for the physical channel on the frequency domain resource.
  • the information 24 is only applied to specific frequency domain resources.
  • the access network device configures three frequency domain resources (represented as frequency domain resource 1, frequency domain resource 2, and frequency domain resource 3) for the terminal device, and the information 24 can be applied only to the frequency domain resource 1 and the frequency domain resource. 3.
  • the information 24 is more flexible, but the signaling overhead is relatively large.
  • the terminal device may carry the second configuration information by using a radio resource control (RRC) layer message, a media access control (MAC) layer message, or a physical layer message.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • MAC media access control
  • the RRC layer message may be a system broadcast message, or the RRC layer message may be a dedicated RRC message.
  • the invention is not limited.
  • the first configuration information and the second configuration information may be in the same message or in different messages, and the invention is not limited.
  • the transceiver 302 in the access network device may be configured to send the second configuration information, or the processor 301 in the access network device controls the transceiver 302 to send the second configuration information.
  • the transceiver 204 in the terminal device can be configured to receive the second configuration information, or the processor 201 in the terminal device controls the transceiver 204 to receive the second configuration information.
  • the second configuration information may be fixed in the protocol.
  • step S102 can be replaced with the terminal device obtaining the second configuration information. That is, the access network device does not need to send the second configuration information to the terminal device, and the terminal device does not need to receive the second configuration information from the access network.
  • the processor 201 in the terminal device is configured to obtain the second configuration information.
  • Step S102 is optional.
  • Step S103 The terminal device determines the first SRS on the first time period of the frequency domain resource.
  • the PH report is triggered before the terminal device determines the first SRS.
  • the condition for triggering the PH report includes any one of the following conditions:
  • the PH reporting timer (prohibitPHR-Timer) is disabled, and the path loss value of at least one active frequency domain resource is greater than a specific value, such as dl-Pathloss Change dB.
  • the configured uplink frequency domain resource is activated, where the uplink frequency domain resource may be SCell
  • Condition 6 for any frequency domain resource, the value of the power backoff change exceeds a certain value, such as dl-PathlossChange dB, since the last PHR was sent under the condition that the prohibitPHR-Timer expired.
  • the SRS and physical channel power control modes change. For example, unified power control for SRS and physical channels becomes power control for SRS and physical channels, respectively, or power control for SRS and physical channels respectively becomes unified power control for SRS and physical channels.
  • the resources of the SRS are configured or reconfigured.
  • the previous terminal device is not configured with the SRS resource, and the SRS resource is configured through the first configuration information, or the SRS resource of the previous terminal device is changed.
  • the terminal device may determine the first SRS on the first time period of the frequency domain resource.
  • the length of the first time period may represent the shortest time to transmit one transport block (TransportBlock, TB) or a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU).
  • the length of the first time period may be N milliseconds, or the length of the first time period may be equal to the length of N subframes, or equal to the length of N time slots (Slots), or equal to N mini time slots (
  • the length of the Mini-Slot is equal to the length of the N OFDM symbols, or equal to the length of the Transmission Time Interval (TTI).
  • TTI Transmission Time Interval
  • N is a positive integer. In different communication systems, the length of the first time period can be different.
  • the length of the first time period may be 10 ms, or 2 ms.
  • the length of the first time period may be 1 ms, or 0.5 ms. The invention is not limited.
  • the first time period represents a specific time slot.
  • Figure 5 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting SRS on time slot i, time slot i+x, time slot i+y and time slot i+z.
  • one slot includes 14 OFDM symbols, and one small box in the figure represents one OFDM symbol, and the first OFDM symbol of the slot to the slot The last OFDM symbols are numbered OFDM0 to OFDM13, respectively.
  • the first configuration information includes five SRSs, and the corresponding SRS identification information is 0 to 4, and the five SRSs are respectively represented as SRS0 to SRS4).
  • the terminal device determines that it is necessary to transmit SRS0 to SRS2 according to the first configuration information.
  • the terminal device determines that it is necessary to transmit SRS3 to SRS4 according to the first configuration information.
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit the SRS according to the first configuration information.
  • the terminal device determines that it is necessary to transmit SRS0 to SRS4 according to the first configuration information.
  • the SRS1 and the SRS2 are transmitted on the same OFDM symbol. In this case, the resources of the SRS1 and the SRS2 in the frequency domain may be different, or the resources in the code domain may be different.
  • the first SRS includes one or more of at least one SRS in step S101.
  • the terminal device may determine the first SRS by using one or more combinations of the following implementation manners.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the information 11 included in the first configuration information, indication information indicating a manner of sending the at least one SRS, and determines the first SRS. For example, the terminal device obtains a pre-configured rule, and the rule may be that the aperiodic transmission mode has the highest priority, the semi-static transmission mode has the lower priority, and the periodic transmission mode has the lowest priority.
  • the terminal device may determine the first SRS by using a priority from high to low (or low to high).
  • One implementation manner of the mode 1 may be that the terminal device determines the first SRS from one or more SRSs actually to be sent on the first time period.
  • the SRS0 transmission mode is an aperiodic transmission mode
  • the SRS1 transmission mode is a semi-static transmission mode
  • the SRS2 transmission mode is a periodic transmission mode
  • the SRS3 transmission mode is a semi-static transmission mode.
  • the SRS4 transmission mode is a periodic transmission mode.
  • the terminal device determines that the first SRS on the time slot i is SRS0 because the priority of the aperiodic transmission mode is higher than the priority of the semi-static transmission mode and the periodic transmission mode.
  • the terminal device determines that the first SRS on the time slot i+x is SRS3.
  • the terminal device determines the first SRS in the first time period according to the sending manner of all the at least one SRS.
  • the first SRS determined by the terminal device includes the SRS that is not sent on the first time period.
  • the SRS0 transmission mode is a semi-static transmission mode
  • the SRS2 transmission mode is a periodic transmission mode
  • the SRS3 transmission mode is a half.
  • the SRS4 transmission mode is a periodic transmission mode.
  • the terminal device On the slot i+x, although the terminal device only transmits SRS3 and SRS4, according to the above pre-configured rules, the terminal device still determines that the first SRS on the slot i+x is SRS0.
  • the priority order of the various sending modes in the foregoing pre-configured rules may also be the priority of the periodic sending mode > the priority of the semi-static sending mode > the priority of the periodic sending mode, where the symbol “>” means higher than.
  • the priority order of the various sending modes in the pre-configured rules is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present invention.
  • Mode 2 The terminal device determines, according to the information 12 included in the first configuration information, indication information indicating a function of the at least one SRS, to determine the first SRS. For example, the terminal device obtains a pre-configured rule, which may be a priority for codebook based transmission > priority for non-codebook based transmission > priority for SRS handover > for The priority of beam management, where the symbol ">" indicates higher.
  • the terminal device may determine the first SRS by using a priority from high to low (or low to high).
  • the function of the SRS may in turn be a function for uplink measurement or a function for downlink measurement, for example, for codebook-based transmission and for non-codebook-based transmission, which are functions for downlink measurement,
  • the SRS switching is an uplink measurement function or the like.
  • the terminal device may determine the first SRS according to a pre-configured rule, such as a priority of a function for uplink measurement > (or less than) a priority of a function for downlink measurement.
  • One implementation manner of the mode 2 may be that the terminal device determines the first SRS from one or more SRSs actually to be sent on the first time period. Still taking FIG. 5 as an example, it is assumed that the function of SRS0 is used for codebook-based transmission, and the function of SRS1 is for non-codebook-based transmission, and the function of SRS2 is for SRS handover, and the function of SRS3 is used. For SRS handover, the function of SRS4 is for beam management. On slot i, since the priority for codebook based transmission is higher than for non-codebook based transmission and for SRS handover, the terminal device determines the first SRS on slot i For SRS0. On slot i+x, since the priority for SRS handover is higher than the priority for beam management, the terminal device determines that the first SRS on slot i+x is SRS3.
  • the terminal device determines the first SRS in the first time period according to the function of all the at least one SRS.
  • the first SRS determined by the terminal device includes the SRS that is not sent on the first time period.
  • the function of SRS0 is used for codebook-based transmission
  • the function of SRS1 is for non-codebook-based transmission
  • the function of SRS2 is for SRS handover, SRS3 function.
  • the function of SRS4 is for beam management.
  • the terminal device On the slot i+x, although the terminal device only transmits SRS3 and SRS4, according to the above pre-configured rules, the terminal device still determines that the first SRS on the slot i+x is SRS0.
  • priority order of various transmission modes in the above pre-configured rules can also be used for priority based on non-codebook transmission > priority for codebook based transmission > for SRS handover Priority > Priority for beam management, where the symbol ">" indicates higher.
  • the embodiments of the present invention do not specifically limit the priority order of the various functions in the pre-configured rules.
  • the terminal device determines the first SRS according to the time domain location information of the at least one SRS included in the first configuration information. For example, the terminal device obtains a pre-configured rule, and the rule may be that the earlier the time domain location of the at least one SRS in the first time period, the higher the priority, the later the time domain location, and the lower the priority.
  • the terminal device may determine the first SRS by using a priority from high to low (or low to high).
  • the time domain location indicates that the OFDM symbol corresponding to the time domain location has a smaller number in the first time period, and vice versa, the time domain location is later, the OFDM symbol corresponding to the time domain location is within the first time period. The number is larger.
  • An implementation manner of the mode 3 may be that the terminal device determines the first SRS from one or more SRSs that are actually to be sent on the first time period. Still taking FIG. 5 as an example, the time domain position of SRS0 is symbol 8, the time domain position of SRS1 is symbol 11, the time domain position of SRS2 is symbol 11, the time domain position of SRS3 is symbol 10, and the time domain position of SRS4 is symbol 13.
  • slot i since the time domain position of SRS0 is earlier than the time domain positions of SRS1 and SRS2, the priority of SRS0 is higher than the priorities of SRS1 and SRS2, and the terminal device determines that the first SRS on slot i is SRS0. .
  • the terminal device determines that the first SRS on the slot i+x is SRS3.
  • the terminal device determines the first SRS in the first time period according to the time domain location information of all the at least one SRS.
  • the first SRS determined by the terminal device includes the SRS that is not sent on the first time period.
  • the time domain position of SRS0 is symbol 8
  • the time domain position of SRS1 is symbol 11
  • the time domain position of SRS2 is symbol 11
  • the time domain position of SRS3 is symbol 10
  • the terminal device On the slot i+x, although the terminal device only transmits SRS3 and SRS4, according to the above pre-configured rules, the terminal device still determines that the first SRS on the slot i+x is SRS0.
  • the foregoing pre-configured rule may also be that the earlier the time domain location of the at least one SRS in the first time period, the lower the priority, the later the time domain location, and the higher the priority.
  • the embodiments of the present invention are not specifically limited.
  • the terminal device determines the first SRS according to the identifier information of the at least one SRS included in the first configuration information. For example, the terminal device obtains a pre-configured rule, and the rule may be that the identifier information of the at least one SRS is smaller, the higher the priority, the larger the identifier information, and the lower the priority.
  • the terminal device may determine the first SRS of the plurality of SRSs on the first time period by using a priority from high to low (or low to high).
  • An implementation manner of the method 4 may be that the terminal device determines the first SRS from one or more SRSs that are actually to be sent on the first time period.
  • the identification information of SRS0 is 0 (for example, the identifier or index is equal to 0)
  • the identification information of SRS1 is 1
  • the identification information of SRS2 is 2
  • the identification information of SRS3 is 3
  • the identification information of SRS4 is 4.
  • the terminal device determines that the first SRS on the time slot i is SRS0.
  • the terminal device determines that the first SRS on the slot i+x is SRS3.
  • the terminal device determines the first SRS in the first time period according to the identifier information of all the at least one SRS.
  • the first SRS determined by the terminal device includes the SRS that is not sent on the first time period.
  • the identification information of SRS0 is 0 (for example, the identifier or index is equal to 0)
  • the identification information of SRS1 is 1
  • the identification information of SRS2 is 2
  • the identification information of SRS3 is 3
  • the identification information of SRS4 is Is 4.
  • the terminal device still determines that the first SRS on the slot i+x is SRS0.
  • the foregoing pre-configured rule may also be that the smaller the identifier information of the SRS is, the lower the priority is, the larger the identifier information is, and the higher the priority is.
  • the embodiments of the present invention are not specifically limited.
  • the first SRS may be all the at least one SRS having the same priority or having no specified priority.
  • Each of the pre-configured rules in modes 1 to 4 may be fixed in the protocol or transmitted to the terminal device through the access network device.
  • the terminal device passes the Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer message, and the media access control (MAC) Layer messages, or physical layer messages, can receive pre-configured rules.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC media access control
  • the RRC layer message may be a system broadcast message, or the RRC layer message may be a dedicated RRC message. The invention is not limited.
  • the terminal device determines that the first SRS includes all the at least one SRS in the first configuration information. For example, still taking FIG. 5 as an example, in the slot i, the slot i+x, the slot i+y, and the slot i+z, the first SRS includes SRS0 to SRS4.
  • the terminal device determines that the first SRS on the first time period includes one or more SRSs to be actually sent in the first time period. For example, still taking FIG. 5 as an example, in the slot i, the first SRS includes SRS0 to SRS3, and in the slot i+x, the first SRS includes SRS3 to SRS4, and in the slot i+z, the first SRS includes SRS0 to SRS4.
  • the terminal device autonomously determines the first SRS on the first time period.
  • the terminal device first determines, according to the mode 1, the M SRSs with the highest priority from the at least one SRS included in the first configuration information, and then determines the N SRSs with the highest priority from the M SRSs according to the mode 2.
  • the first SRS includes the N SRSs.
  • M are positive integers, and M ⁇ N ⁇ 1.
  • the terminal device first determines, according to the mode 2, the M SRSs with the highest priority from the at least one SRS included in the first configuration information, and then determines the N with the highest priority from the M SRSs according to the mode 3.
  • the invention is not limited to specific combinations.
  • the present invention does not limit the application priority of the modes 1 to 4 in the specific combination.
  • the first SRS is determined by using two or more combinations of the mode 1 to the mode 4, if the application priority of the mode 1 to mode 4 is applied, one of the i-th application modes 1 to 4 is determined, and the determined SRS is determined. The number of the SRS is greater than 0.
  • the first SRS includes a first SRS group.
  • the determination method is similar to the determination of the first SRS and will not be described again.
  • the processor 201 in the terminal device can be used to determine the first SRS.
  • Step S104 The terminal device determines power headroom information on the first time period of the frequency domain resource.
  • the terminal device may send the SRS and the physical channel at the first time) Transmitting information
  • the terminal device may determine information of a combination of one or more of the first power headroom and the fifth power headroom information in the first plurality of first time periods.
  • the first type of power headroom information the terminal device determines one or more first power headroom information.
  • the first power headroom information is the first maximum transmit power of the terminal equipment in the frequency domain resource (indicated as P cmax,c ,c is an identifier of the frequency domain resource) and the power of the second SRS is sent by the terminal device
  • the second SRS includes one of the at least one SRS included in the first SRS.
  • FIG. 5 it is assumed that, according to the manner of determining the first SRS, determining that the first SRS on the time slot i is SRS0 and SRS1, the terminal device determines two first power headroom information, which are respectively represented as PH1. PH2.
  • the power of transmitting SRS0 may be the power of actually transmitting SRS0, or the estimated power of transmitting SRS0, and the power of transmitting SRS1 may be the power of actually transmitting SRS1, or the estimated power of transmitting SRS1.
  • the terminal device determines two first power headroom information, which are respectively denoted as PH1, PH2.
  • PH1 P cmax , c - the power to transmit SRS0
  • PH1 P cmax , c - the power to transmit SRS3.
  • the power of the SRS0 is the power determined according to the reference format.
  • the power of the SRS3 may be the power of actually transmitting the SRS3, or the estimated power of the SRS3.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource is at least the terminal device according to the maximum transmit power capability, the maximum transmit power of the frequency domain resource notified by the access network device, and the power backoff.
  • the terminal power capability is 23 decibels milliwatts (dBm)
  • the maximum transmit power of the frequency domain resource notified by the access network device is 20 dBm
  • the power backoff is 2 dBm
  • the terminal device is the first in the frequency domain resource.
  • the maximum transmit power is equal to 18 dBm.
  • the following various first maximum transmit powers are similar and will not be described again.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may be the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device. This is the easiest way.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of the transmit SRS of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource.
  • the PH calculated in this way is more accurate.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of each SRS in the at least one SRS of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource, that is, the first Each SRS in the at least one SRS included in the configuration information is associated with one maximum transmit power, and the first maximum transmit power associated with different SRSs may be the same or different. For example, when PH1 is calculated, the first maximum transmit power associated with transmitting SRS0 is used, and when PH2 is calculated, the first maximum transmit power associated with transmitting SRS1 is used. This way the calculated pH is more accurate.
  • the second power headroom information determines one or more second power headroom information.
  • the second power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the terminal device on a first physical channel.
  • the first physical channel is one of the multiple channels
  • the first physical channel is the channel. For example, if the physical channel includes the PUSCH on the frequency domain resource, the terminal device determines one power headroom information. For another example, if the physical channel includes the PUSCH and the PUCCH on the frequency domain resource, the terminal device determines two power headroom information.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may be the maximum transmit power of the terminal device. This is the easiest way.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of the transmit physical channel of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource. The PH calculated in this way is more accurate.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of each of the at least one channel included in the transmit physical channel of the frequency domain resource of the terminal device, different The first maximum transmit power associated with the channel may be the same or different.
  • the maximum transmit power associated with transmitting the PUSCH is used, and when calculating the PH of the PUCCH, the first maximum transmit power associated with transmitting the PUCCH is used. This way the calculated pH is more accurate.
  • the third power headroom information determines the third power headroom information.
  • the third power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the first SRS sent by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines that the third power headroom information may be that the terminal device is in the The first maximum transmit power of the frequency domain resource - (the power of transmitting SRS0 + the power of transmitting SRS1).
  • SRS0 and SRS1 are actually transmitted.
  • the power of transmitting SRS0 may be the power of actually transmitting SRS0, or the estimated power of transmitting SRS0
  • the power of transmitting SRS1 may be the power of actually transmitting SRS1, or the estimated power of transmitting SRS1.
  • the terminal device determines that the third power headroom information may be the terminal device in the frequency domain resource.
  • First maximum transmit power - (power of transmitting SRS0 + power of transmitting SRS3).
  • the power of transmitting SRS0 is the power determined according to the reference format (Reference Format), and the power of transmitting SRS3 may be the power of actually transmitting SRS3, or the estimated power of transmitting SRS3.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may be the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device. This is the easiest way.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of the transmit SRS of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource. The PH calculated in this way is more accurate.
  • the fourth power headroom information determines the fourth power headroom information.
  • the fourth power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the terminal device on the physical channel. For example, if the physical channel includes the PUSCH on the frequency domain resource, that is, the terminal device cannot transmit the PUCCH and the PUSCH simultaneously on the frequency domain resource, the terminal device determines that the fourth power headroom information is the frequency domain resource.
  • First Maximum Transmit Power The power of the terminal equipment on the PUSCH. If the PUSCH is actually transmitted in the first time period, the power in the PUSCH may be the power of actually transmitting the PUSCH or the estimated power of the transmitted PUSCH.
  • the power on the PUSCH is the power determined according to the Reference Format. For example, if the physical channel includes the PUSCH and the PUCCH on the frequency domain resource, that is, the terminal device can simultaneously transmit the PUCCH and the PUSCH on the frequency domain resource, the terminal device determines that the fourth power headroom information is the frequency.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the domain resource - (power of the terminal device on the PUSCH + power of the terminal device on the PUCCH).
  • the power in the PUSCH and the PUCCH may be the power of actually transmitting the PUSCH and the PUCCH, or the estimated power of the transmitted PUSCH and the PUCCH. If the PUSCH or PUCCH is not actually transmitted during the first time period, the power on the PUSCH or PUCCH is the power determined according to the Reference Format. If the PUSCH and the PUCCH are not actually transmitted during the first time period, the power on the PUSCH and the PUCCH is the power determined according to the Reference Format.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may be the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device. This is the easiest way.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of the transmit physical channel of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource. The PH calculated in this way is more accurate.
  • the fifth power headroom information the terminal device determines the fifth power headroom information.
  • the fifth power headroom information is a difference between the first maximum transmit power and the first transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource, where the first transmit power is sent by the terminal device to the first SRS The sum of the power and the power on the physical channel.
  • the specific calculation method is similar to the previous method, and will not be described here.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may be the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device. This is the easiest way.
  • the first power headroom information and the second power headroom information are the most detailed, but the signaling overhead is the largest when reporting the power headroom information.
  • the third power headroom information and the fourth power headroom information are more detailed, and the signaling overhead is small.
  • the fifth power headroom information signaling overhead is minimal.
  • One of the possible combinations of the various power headroom information described above is a combination of the first power headroom information and the second power headroom information. This combination method can report the most detailed power headroom information. But the amount of information is relatively large. Another possible combination is a combination of a third power headroom information and a fourth power headroom information. The combination mode can report more detailed power headroom information. But the amount of information is relatively small.
  • the terminal device can determine the first type of power headroom information, and one of the third power headroom information.
  • One or more power headroom information can be determined.
  • the terminal device can determine which power headroom information, or which power headroom information, according to pre-configured rules.
  • the pre-configured rule may be determining the first type of power headroom information, or determining the first type of power headroom information and the second type of power headroom information, or determining the third type of power headroom information and the fourth type of power. The remaining amount information, or the fifth power headroom information is determined, or the first power headroom information and the third power headroom information are determined.
  • the pre-configured rule may be to determine the type of power headroom information according to whether the second configuration information is received.
  • the terminal device determines the first power headroom information and the second power headroom information, or determines the third power headroom information and the fourth power headroom information.
  • the terminal device determines the fifth power headroom information.
  • the pre-configured rules can be fixed in the protocol or sent to the terminal device through the access network device.
  • the terminal device passes the Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer message, and the media access control (MAC) Layer messages, or physical layer messages, can receive pre-configured rules.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC media access control
  • the RRC layer message may be a system broadcast message, or the RRC layer message may be a dedicated RRC message. The invention is not limited.
  • the MAC layer entity of the terminal device or the terminal device may obtain at least one of the first power headroom information and the fifth power headroom information from the physical layer.
  • the MAC layer entity of the terminal device or the terminal device may also obtain the first maximum transmit power of the frequency domain resource from the physical layer.
  • the MAC layer entity of the terminal device or the terminal device may also obtain, from the physical layer, a first maximum transmit power of the frequency domain resource for transmitting the SRS and/or a first maximum transmit power for transmitting the physical channel.
  • the MAC layer entity of the terminal device or the terminal device may also obtain a reference format of the physical channel or the SRS from the physical layer.
  • the processor 201 in the terminal device can be used to determine power headroom information.
  • Step S105 The terminal device sends power headroom information to the access network device, and correspondingly, the access network device receives the power headroom information sent by the terminal device.
  • the power headroom information includes one or more first power headroom information determined in step S104, one or more second power headroom information, third power headroom information, fourth power headroom information, and fifth power. One or more pieces of information in the balance information.
  • the power headroom information may further include a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may be the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of the transmit SRS of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of each SRS in the at least one SRS of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource, that is, the first Each SRS in the at least one SRS included in the configuration information is associated with a first maximum transmit power, and the first maximum transmit power associated with different SRSs may be the same or different.
  • the maximum transmit power associated with transmitting SRS0 is used, and when PH2 is calculated, the first maximum transmit power associated with transmitting SRS1 is used.
  • the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of the transmit physical channel of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource.
  • the content that can be included in the power headroom information sent by the terminal device to the access network device is described below. It should be noted that, in the following various contents, the information P included is used to indicate whether the power back-off is performed when the terminal device determines the PH, and V is used to indicate whether the PH value is based on actual transmission (Real transmission) or based on a reference format ( Reference Format), R represents a reserved bit. A dashed box indicates that the content is optional.
  • the information P, V and PH may appear in pairs, as shown in Figures 6 to 11, or only PH, without P and / or V.
  • the PHs in the content 1 to the content 6 can occupy 6 bits. As shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 11 , other numbers of bits can be occupied, for example, 7 bits are occupied.
  • the present invention only describes the content included in the power headroom information, and does not limit the number of bits occupied by the PH.
  • Content 1 including the following information:
  • the one or more first power headroom information determined in step S104 wherein the first power headroom information may be Type3 or a new type, which is not limited in the present invention.
  • the one or more first power headroom information may be arranged in the order of small to large (or large to small) identification information of the at least one SRS included in the first SRS.
  • Figure 6 shows a possible example of Content 1.
  • PH (SRS0) to PH (SRSn) indicate first power headroom information corresponding to n SRSs included in the first SRS.
  • the content 1 further includes a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the frequency domain resource. Further, the content 1 may be replaced by a PH with a first maximum transmit power associated with each PH.
  • the content 1 may include ⁇ PH(SRS0), Pcmax SRS0 ⁇ , ⁇ PH(SRS1), Pcmax in order. SRS1 ⁇ and so on.
  • the present invention does not limit the order of one or more first power headroom information.
  • the third power headroom information determined in step S104 wherein the third power headroom information may be Type 3 or a new type, which is not limited in the present invention.
  • Figure 7 gives a possible example of Content 2.
  • PH SRS
  • the content 2 further includes a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the frequency domain resource.
  • Content 3 including the following information:
  • a second power headroom information determined in step S104 wherein the second power headroom information may be Type1, that is, power headroom information when the physical channel is a PUSCH channel.
  • the second power headroom information may be power headroom information of the PUCCH, that is, power headroom information when the physical channel is a PUCCH channel.
  • Figure 8 gives a possible example of Content 3.
  • PH (Type 1) represents the second power headroom information of the PUSCH.
  • the content 3 further includes a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the frequency domain resource.
  • Content 4 including the following information:
  • a second power headroom information determined in step S104 wherein the second power headroom information is Type2, that is, power headroom information when the physical channel is a PUSCH and a PUCCH channel.
  • the second power headroom information may be power headroom information of the PUCCH, that is, power headroom information when the physical channel is a PUCCH channel.
  • Figure 9 gives a possible example of Content 4. As shown in FIG. 9, PH (Type 2) represents second power headroom information of PUSCH and PUCCH.
  • the content 4 further includes a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the frequency domain resource.
  • Content 5 including the following information:
  • the fifth power headroom information determined in step S104 gives a possible example of Content 5.
  • PH SRS+PUSCH
  • the physical channel is a PUSCH.
  • the content 5 further includes a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the frequency domain resource.
  • Content 6 including the following information:
  • the fifth power headroom information determined in step S104 is a possible example of content 6.
  • the PH (SRS+PUSCH+PUCCH) represents the fifth power headroom information of the first SRS and the physical channel, where the physical channel is the PUSCH and the PUSCH.
  • the content 6 further includes a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the frequency domain resource.
  • the power headroom information determined by the terminal device may include one of Contents 1 to 6 above.
  • the power headroom information determined by the terminal device may include a combination of a plurality of the above contents 1 to 6. The combination of multiples is described below. It should be noted that the present invention does not limit the order in which the various contents included in the following combinations are present in the power headroom information.
  • One possible combination 1 is content 2+ content 3.
  • the power headroom information reflects the power headroom information when the SRS and the PUSCH are simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resources.
  • the combination mode if the maximum transmit power in the content 2 and the content 3 is the same, the combination may include only one maximum transmit power, and the one maximum transmit power is located at the end of the combination, which may save signaling. Overhead.
  • the power headroom information reflects the power headroom information when the SRS and the PUSCH are simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resources.
  • the combination may include only one maximum transmit power, and the one maximum transmit power is located at the end of the combination, which may save signaling. Overhead.
  • the power headroom information reflects the power headroom information when the SRS and the PUSCH are simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resources. At this time, the power headroom information reflects the power headroom information when the SRS and the PUSCH are simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resources. Compared with the combination mode 1, the power headroom information is more accurate, but the signaling overhead is also larger.
  • the combination mode if the maximum transmit power in the content 2 and the content 3 is the same, the combination may include only one maximum transmit power, and the one maximum transmit power is located at the end of the combination, which may save signaling. Overhead.
  • the power headroom information reflects power headroom information when the SRS and the PUSCH and the PUCCH are simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resources.
  • the combination may include only one maximum transmit power, and the one maximum transmit power is located at the end of the combination, which may save signaling. Overhead.
  • the power headroom information reflects power headroom information when the SRS and the PUSCH and the PUCCH are simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resources.
  • the combination mode if the content 3, the maximum transmission power in the content 4 and the content 6 are the same, the combination may include only one maximum transmission power, and the one maximum transmission power is located at the end of the combination, Save signaling overhead. Compared with the combination mode 4, the power headroom information is more accurate, but the signaling overhead is also larger.
  • the power headroom information reflects power headroom information when the SRS and the PUSCH and the PUCCH are simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resources.
  • the combination mode if the maximum transmission power in the content 2, the content 3, the content 4, and the content 6 is the same, the combination may include only one maximum transmission power, and the one maximum transmission power is located in the combination. Finally, signaling overhead can be saved. Compared with the combination mode 4, the power headroom information is more accurate, but the signaling overhead is also larger.
  • Another possible combination 7 is content 1 + content 2.
  • the power headroom information reflects the power headroom information when the SRS is simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resource. If the maximum transmit power in content 1 and content 2 is the same, the combination may include only one maximum transmit power, and the one maximum transmit power is at the end of the combination, which may save signaling overhead.
  • the power headroom information in step S105 may be information obtained by quantizing the calculated value of the power headroom.
  • the specific quantization means may be a uniform step size for the power headroom or a non-uniform step in a certain value interval. Long way to quantify.
  • the terminal device may report the power headroom information including one of the content 1 to the content 6 according to the pre-configured rule, or report the power headroom information including the combination of the multiple content.
  • the second terminal device reports power headroom information including content 1 and/or content 2 and/or possible combinations including content 1 and/or content 2.
  • the power headroom information reported by the second terminal device does not include the possible combination manner of the content 1 and/or the content 2.
  • the access network device sends the third indication information to the terminal device, which is used to indicate which combination of the content or the content is reported by the terminal device.
  • the power headroom information further includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate identifier information of one SRS in the at least one SRS included in the first SRS, where the first indication information is The first power headroom information is associated; when the first SRS includes only a part of the at least one SRS configured in the first configuration information, the terminal device reports the identifier information of the SRS corresponding to the first power headroom information.
  • the understanding of the first SRS by the access network device is consistent with the terminal device, which is advantageous for better resource allocation and/or power control.
  • the terminal device determines power headroom information on each frequency domain resource.
  • the power headroom information further includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the identifier information of the frequency domain resource.
  • One way to implement the second indication information is to use a bitmap. For example, a bitmap is included in the power headroom information, and each bit in the bitmap is associated with a frequency domain resource. The bit value in the bitmap is 0, indicating that the terminal device reports the power headroom information of the frequency domain resource associated with the bit.
  • the terminal device may send power headroom information to the access network device through a MAC layer message or an RRC layer message.
  • the transceiver 204 in the terminal device can be configured to transmit the power headroom information, or the processor 201 in the terminal device controls the transceiver 204 to transmit the power headroom information.
  • the transceiver 302 in the access network device can be configured to receive the power headroom information, or the processor 301 in the access network device controls the transceiver 302 to receive the power headroom information.
  • the embodiments of the present invention further provide a device (for example, an integrated circuit, a wireless device, a circuit module, etc.) for implementing the above method.
  • a device for example, an integrated circuit, a wireless device, a circuit module, etc.
  • Implementations of the devices described herein may be stand-alone devices or may be part of a larger device.
  • the device may be (i) a self-contained IC; (ii) a collection of one or more ICs, which may include a memory IC for storing data and/or instructions; (iii) an RFIC, such as an RF receiver or RF transmitter (iv) an ASIC, such as a mobile station modem; (v) a module that can be embedded in other devices; (vi) a receiver, a cellular phone, a wireless device, a handset, or a mobile unit; (vii) other, etc. Wait.
  • a self-contained IC may include a memory IC for storing data and/or instructions; (iii) an RFIC, such as an RF receiver or RF transmitter (iv) an ASIC, such as a mobile station modem; (v) a module that can be embedded in other devices; (vi) a receiver, a cellular phone, a wireless device, a handset, or a mobile unit; (vii) other, etc. Wait.
  • the method and apparatus provided by the embodiments of the present invention may be applied to a terminal device or a network device (which may be collectively referred to as a wireless device).
  • the terminal device or network device or wireless device may include a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • the hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and a memory (also referred to as main memory).
  • the operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through a process, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a Windows operating system.
  • the application layer includes applications such as browsers, contacts, word processing software, and instant messaging software.
  • the embodiment of the present invention does not limit the specific structure of the execution body of the method, as long as the transmission signal according to the embodiment of the present invention can be executed by running a program recording the code of the method of the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the method can be communicated.
  • the execution body of the method for wireless communication in the embodiment of the present invention may be a terminal device or a network device, or a function module that can call a program and execute a program in the terminal device or the network device.
  • the above embodiments it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer program instructions When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in accordance with embodiments of the present invention are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transfer to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (SSD)).
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the foregoing processes does not mean the order of execution sequence, and the order of execution of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and the present invention should not be The implementation of the embodiments constitutes any limitation.
  • the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the unit is only a logical function division.
  • there may be another division manner for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
  • the functions may be stored in a computer readable storage medium if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the embodiments of the present invention, or the part contributing to the prior art or the part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium.
  • the instructions include a plurality of instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or an access network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present invention.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like. .

Abstract

Provided in the embodiments of the present invention are a wireless communication method and a device. In the present method and device, an access network device configures for a terminal device at least one sounding reference signal (SRS) on a frequency domain resource. The terminal device determines the power headroom information of the frequency domain resource on the basis of part or all of said at least one SRS. When a physical channel can be sent on the frequency domain resource, the terminal device can also determine the power headroom information of the frequency domain resource on the basis of part or all of the at least one SRS and the physical channel. The terminal device sends the determined power headroom information to the access network device. The present method and device can realize more accurate power headroom information reporting, thus helping to realize independent power control and better resource allocation for SRS's and physical channels.

Description

无线通信的方法和装置Method and device for wireless communication 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种无线通信的方法和装置。The present application relates to the field of communications and, more particularly, to a method and apparatus for wireless communication.
背景技术Background technique
在长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统,终端设备向演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,eNB)发送功率余量报告(Power Headroom Report,PHR)。PHR是包含功率余量(Power Headroom,PH)信息的媒体接入控制(Media Access Control,MAC)控制单元(Control Element,CE)。PHR可以为eNB提供用于功率控制和调度的信息。eNB可以根据PHR为终端设备的上行传输选择合适的调制与编码策略(Modulation and Coding Scheme,MCS),资源大小,功率控制参数等。In a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, a terminal device sends a Power Headroom Report (PHR) to an evolved base station (eNB). The PHR is a Media Access Control (MAC) Control Element (CE) that contains Power Headroom (PH) information. The PHR can provide the eNB with information for power control and scheduling. The eNB may select an appropriate modulation and coding scheme (MCS), resource size, power control parameters, and the like according to the PHR for the uplink transmission of the terminal device.
在LTE中,针对配置给终端设备的一个服务小区,如果该服务小区被配置为只能发送侦听参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS),则终端设备可以上报该服务小区的SRS的PH,在LTE中称为Type 3 PH;否则,终端设备上报物理上行共享信道(Physical Uplink Shared Channel,PUSCH)的PH,在LTE中称为Type 1 PH,或者,如果终端设备在该服务小区被配置了物理上行控制信道(Physical Uplink Control Channel,PUCCH),终端设备上报Type1 PH和Type 2 PH,其中,Type 2 PH是PUSCH和PUCCH的PH。但是,上述上报PH的方式已经不能满足第五代(5th Generation,5G)新空口(New Radio,NR)系统,因此,亟需提出一种新的解决方案。In LTE, for a serving cell configured for a terminal device, if the serving cell is configured to transmit only a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS), the terminal device may report the PH of the SRS of the serving cell. It is called Type 3 PH in LTE; otherwise, the terminal device reports the PH of the Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH), which is called Type 1 PH in LTE, or if the terminal device is configured with physical in the serving cell. On the uplink control channel (PUCCH), the terminal device reports Type1 PH and Type 2 PH, where Type 2 PH is the PH of PUSCH and PUCCH. However, the above-mentioned method of reporting PH can no longer satisfy the 5th Generation (5G) New Radio (NR) system. Therefore, it is urgent to propose a new solution.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本发明实施例提供了一种无线通信的方法和装置,以实现更精确的功率余量信息上报,更好的功率控制和资源分配。Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and apparatus for wireless communication to implement more accurate power headroom information reporting, better power control, and resource allocation.
第一方面,本发明实施例提供了一种无线通信的方法。该方法包括,终端设备获得第一配置信息,第一配置信息用于配置频域资源的至少一个侦听参考信号SRS。终端设备根据第一配置信息确定频域资源的第一时间段上的第一SRS。其中,第一SRS包括所述至少一个SRS中的一个或多个;所述终端设备根据所述第一SRS确定频域资源的功率余量信息。然后,终端设备在第一时间段上发送频域资源的功率余量信息。通过本发明实施例的方案,终端设备可以上报更精确的功率余量信息,从而有助于接入网设备进行更好的功率控制或资源分配。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a method for wireless communication. The method includes: the terminal device obtains first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure at least one listening reference signal SRS of the frequency domain resource. The terminal device determines the first SRS on the first time period of the frequency domain resource according to the first configuration information. The first SRS includes one or more of the at least one SRS; the terminal device determines power headroom information of the frequency domain resource according to the first SRS. Then, the terminal device sends power headroom information of the frequency domain resource on the first time period. With the solution of the embodiment of the present invention, the terminal device can report more accurate power headroom information, thereby facilitating the access network device to perform better power control or resource allocation.
在一种可能的设计中,终端设备根据所述第一SRS和所述频域资源的所述第一时间段上的物理信道确定所述频域资源的功率余量信息。通过本发明实施例的方案,终端设备可以上报SRS和物理信道功率余量信息,从而有助于接入网设备对SRS和物理信道独立的功率控制。In a possible design, the terminal device determines power headroom information of the frequency domain resource according to the first SRS and the physical channel on the first time period of the frequency domain resource. With the solution of the embodiment of the present invention, the terminal device can report the SRS and the physical channel power headroom information, thereby facilitating independent power control of the SRS and the physical channel by the access network device.
在一种可能的设计中,终端设备根据所述至少一个SRS的发送方式,确定第一SRS。终端设备和接入网设备可以应用相同的规则,确定第一SRS,以便对第一SRS理解一致。同时,可以减少信令开销。In a possible design, the terminal device determines the first SRS according to the manner in which the at least one SRS is sent. The terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, signaling overhead can be reduced.
在一种可能的设计中,终端设备根据至少一个SRS的功能,确定第一SRS。终端设备和接入网设备可以应用相同的规则,确定第一SRS,以便对第一SRS理解一致。同时,可以减少信令开销。In a possible design, the terminal device determines the first SRS according to the function of the at least one SRS. The terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, signaling overhead can be reduced.
在一种可能的设计中,终端设备根据至少一个SRS在所述第一时间段中的时域位置,确定第一SRS。终端设备和接入网设备可以应用相同的规则,确定第一SRS,以便对第一SRS理 解一致。同时,可以减少信令开销。In a possible design, the terminal device determines the first SRS according to the time domain position of the at least one SRS in the first time period. The terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to be consistent with the first SRS. At the same time, signaling overhead can be reduced.
在一种可能的设计中,终端设备根据至少一个SRS的标识信息,确定第一SRS。终端设备和接入网设备可以应用相同的规则,确定第一SRS,以便对第一SRS理解一致。同时,可以减少信令开销。In a possible design, the terminal device determines the first SRS according to the identification information of the at least one SRS. The terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, signaling overhead can be reduced.
在一种可能的设计中,第一SRS包括至少一个SRS中的所有SRS。终端设备和接入网设备可以应用相同的规则,确定第一SRS,以便对第一SRS理解一致。同时,可以上报更详细的功率余量信息。In one possible design, the first SRS includes all of the SRSs in at least one SRS. The terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, more detailed power headroom information can be reported.
在一种可能的设计中,终端设备获得第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于指示:终端设备分别接收频域资源上的物理信道和频域资源上的SRS的功率控制命令,或者,终端设备分别接送物理信道和SRS的功率控制命令,或者,终端设备用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同的指示信息。In a possible design, the terminal device obtains second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used to indicate that the terminal device separately receives the power control command of the physical channel on the frequency domain resource and the SRS on the frequency domain resource, or And the terminal device respectively picks up the power control command of the physical channel and the SRS, or the indication information that the terminal device uses to transmit the second maximum transmit power of the SRS and the second maximum transmit power on the physical channel.
在一种可能的设计中,终端设备用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同的指示信息包括终端设备用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率,其中,用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率与用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同。In a possible design, the indication information that the second maximum transmit power of the terminal device for transmitting the SRS and the second maximum transmit power for the physical channel are different includes the second maximum transmit power of the terminal device for transmitting the SRS. And a second maximum transmit power for use on the physical channel, wherein the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS is different than the second maximum transmit power for the physical channel.
第二方面,本发明实施例提供了一种无线通信的方法。该方法包括,接入网设备向终端设备发送第一配置信息,第一配置信息用于配置频域资源的至少一个侦听参考信号(SRS);接入网设备确定频域资源的第一时间段上的第一SRS,第一SRS包括所述至少一个SRS中的一个或多个;接入网设备接收终端设备在所述第一时间段上发送的频域资源的功率余量信息,其中,功率余量信息是基于第一SRS确定的。通过本发明实施例的方案,接入网设备可以获得更精确的功率余量信息,从而有助于接入网设备进行更好的功率控制或资源分配。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a method for wireless communication. The method includes: the access network device sends first configuration information to the terminal device, where the first configuration information is used to configure at least one listening reference signal (SRS) of the frequency domain resource; and the first time when the access network device determines the frequency domain resource a first SRS on the segment, the first SRS includes one or more of the at least one SRS; the access network device receives power headroom information of the frequency domain resource sent by the terminal device on the first time period, where The power headroom information is determined based on the first SRS. With the solution of the embodiment of the present invention, the access network device can obtain more accurate power headroom information, thereby facilitating access network devices for better power control or resource allocation.
在一种可能的设计中,功率余量信息是基于第一SRS和频域资源的第一时间段上的物理信道确定的。通过本发明实施例的方案,接入网设备可以获得SRS和物理信道功率余量信息,以更好的实现对SRS和物理信道独立的功率控制。In one possible design, the power headroom information is determined based on the physical channel on the first time period of the first SRS and the frequency domain resource. With the solution of the embodiment of the present invention, the access network device can obtain SRS and physical channel power headroom information to better implement independent power control of the SRS and the physical channel.
在一种可能的设计中,接入网设备根据至少一个SRS的发送方式,确定第一SRS。终端设备和接入网设备可以应用相同的规则,确定第一SRS,以便对第一SRS理解一致。同时,可以减少信令开销。In a possible design, the access network device determines the first SRS according to the manner in which the at least one SRS is sent. The terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, signaling overhead can be reduced.
在一种可能的设计中,接入网设备根据至少一个SRS的功能,确定第一SRS。终端设备和接入网设备可以应用相同的规则,确定第一SRS,以便对第一SRS理解一致。同时,可以减少信令开销。In one possible design, the access network device determines the first SRS based on the functionality of the at least one SRS. The terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, signaling overhead can be reduced.
在一种可能的设计中,接入网设备根据至少一个SRS在所述第一时间段中的时域位置,确定第一SRS。终端设备和接入网设备可以应用相同的规则,确定第一SRS,以便对第一SRS理解一致。同时,可以减少信令开销。In a possible design, the access network device determines the first SRS according to the time domain location of the at least one SRS in the first time period. The terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, signaling overhead can be reduced.
在一种可能的设计中,接入网设备根据至少一个SRS的标识信息,确定第一SRS。终端设备和接入网设备可以应用相同的规则,确定第一SRS,以便对第一SRS理解一致。同时,可以减少信令开销。In a possible design, the access network device determines the first SRS according to the identification information of the at least one SRS. The terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, signaling overhead can be reduced.
在一种可能的设计中,第一SRS包括至少一个SRS中的所有SRS。终端设备和接入网设备可以应用相同的规则,确定第一SRS,以便对第一SRS理解一致。同时,可以上报更详细的功率余量信息。In one possible design, the first SRS includes all of the SRSs in at least one SRS. The terminal device and the access network device can apply the same rule to determine the first SRS so as to understand the first SRS. At the same time, more detailed power headroom information can be reported.
在一种可能的设计中,接入网设备向终端设备发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用 于指示:接入网设备分别发送频域资源上的物理信道和频域资源上的SRS的功率控制命令,或者,接入网设备分别发送物理信道和SRS的功率控制命令,或者,终端设备用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同的指示信息,或者,终端设备用于在所述频域资源上发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在所述频域资源上的物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同的指示信息。In a possible design, the access network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to indicate that the access network device separately sends the physical channel and the frequency domain resource on the frequency domain resource. The power control command of the SRS, or the power control command sent by the access network device to the physical channel and the SRS, or the second maximum transmit power used by the terminal device to transmit the SRS and the second maximum transmit power used on the physical channel Different indication information, or indication information that the terminal device uses the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS on the frequency domain resource and the second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource is different. .
在一种可能的设计中,终端设备用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同的指示信息包括终端设备用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率,其中,用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率与用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同。In a possible design, the indication information that the second maximum transmit power of the terminal device for transmitting the SRS and the second maximum transmit power for the physical channel are different includes the second maximum transmit power of the terminal device for transmitting the SRS. And a second maximum transmit power for use on the physical channel, wherein the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS is different than the second maximum transmit power for the physical channel.
第三方面,本发明实施例提供了一种通信装置。该装置包括,处理器和与处理器耦合的收发器;处理器,用于获得第一配置信息,第一配置信息用于配置频域资源的至少一个侦听参考信号(SRS);处理器,还用于根据所述第一配置信息确定频域资源的第一时间段上的第一SRS,所述第一SRS包括所述至少一个SRS中的一个或多个;处理器,还用于根据所述第一SRS确定频域资源的功率余量信息;所述收发器,用于在所述第一时间段上发送功率余量信息。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication apparatus. The apparatus includes a processor and a transceiver coupled to the processor, a processor configured to obtain first configuration information, the first configuration information configured to configure at least one listening reference signal (SRS) of the frequency domain resource, and a processor, And a method for determining, according to the first configuration information, a first SRS on a first time period of a frequency domain resource, where the first SRS includes one or more of the at least one SRS; The first SRS determines power headroom information of a frequency domain resource; the transceiver is configured to send power headroom information on the first time period.
在一种可能的设计中,处理器,还用于根据所述第一SRS和所述频域资源的所述第一时间段上的物理信道确定所述频域资源的功率余量信息。In a possible design, the processor is further configured to determine, according to the first SRS and the physical channel on the first time period of the frequency domain resource, power headroom information of the frequency domain resource.
在一种可能的设计中,处理器,用于根据至少一个SRS的发送方式,确定所述第一SRS。In a possible design, the processor is configured to determine the first SRS according to a sending manner of the at least one SRS.
在一种可能的设计中,处理器,用于根据至少一个SRS的功能,确定第一SRS。In one possible design, the processor is configured to determine the first SRS according to the function of the at least one SRS.
在一种可能的设计中,处理器,用于根据至少一个SRS在第一时间段中的时域位置,确定第一SRS。In a possible design, the processor is configured to determine the first SRS according to the time domain location of the at least one SRS in the first time period.
在一种可能的设计中,处理器,用于根据至少一个SRS的标识信息,确定第一SRS。In a possible design, the processor is configured to determine the first SRS according to the identifier information of the at least one SRS.
在一种可能的设计中,第一SRS包括至少一个SRS中的所有SRS。In one possible design, the first SRS includes all of the SRSs in at least one SRS.
在一种可能的设计中,处理器,用于获得第二配置信息,第二配置信息用于指示:所述装置分别接收物理信道和SRS的功率控制命令;或者装置分别接收频域资源上的物理信道和频域资源上的SRS的功率控制命令;或者装置用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同的指示信息;或者,装置用于在频域资源上发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在频域资源上的物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同的指示信息。In a possible design, the processor is configured to obtain second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used to indicate that the device separately receives a power control command of the physical channel and the SRS, or the device separately receives the frequency domain resource. a power control command for the SRS on the physical channel and the frequency domain resource; or indication information for transmitting the second maximum transmit power of the SRS and the second maximum transmit power on the physical channel; or The second maximum transmit power of the SRS transmitted on the frequency domain resource and the indication information for the second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource are different.
在一种可能的设计中,用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率与用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同的指示信息包括装置用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率,其中,用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率与用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同。In one possible design, the indication information that the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS is different from the second maximum transmit power for the physical channel includes a second maximum transmit power that the apparatus uses to transmit the SRS and is used for A second maximum transmit power on the physical channel, wherein the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS is different than the second maximum transmit power for transmitting on the physical channel.
在一种可能的设计中,用于在频域资源上发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在频域资源上的物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同的指示信息包括装置用于在频域资源上发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在频域资源上的物理信道上的第二最大发射功率,其中,用于在频域资源上发送SRS的第二最大发射功率与用于在频域资源上的物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同。In one possible design, the indication information for transmitting the second maximum transmit power of the SRS on the frequency domain resource and the second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource comprises means for Transmitting a second maximum transmit power of the SRS on the frequency domain resource and a second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource, wherein the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS on the frequency domain resource is used The second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource is different.
结合上述各方面或可能的设计,在一种可能的设计中,物理信道包括物理上行共享信道和/或物理上行控制信道。In combination with the above aspects or possible designs, in one possible design, the physical channel includes a physical uplink shared channel and/or a physical uplink control channel.
结合上述各方面或可能的设计,在一种可能的设计中,第一配置信息包括如下至少一项: 用于指示所述至少一个SRS的发送方式的指示信息,其中,所述发送方式包括:非周期性的发送方式,或半静态发送方式,或周期性的发送方式;用于指示所述至少一个SRS的功能的指示信息,其中所述功能包括:用于基于码本(CodeBook)的传输,和/或用于基于非码本的传输,和/或用于SRS切换,和/或用于波束管理;所述至少一个SRS的时域位置信息;所述至少一个SRS的标识信息;所述频域资源的标识信息。With reference to the foregoing aspects or possible designs, in a possible design, the first configuration information includes at least one of the following: indication information indicating a manner of sending the at least one SRS, where the sending manner includes: An aperiodic transmission mode, or a semi-static transmission mode, or a periodic transmission mode; indication information for indicating a function of the at least one SRS, wherein the function includes: for codebook-based transmission And/or for non-codebook based transmission, and/or for SRS handover, and/or for beam management; time domain location information of said at least one SRS; identification information of said at least one SRS; The identification information of the frequency domain resource.
结合上述各方面或可能的设计,在一种可能的设计中,功率余量信息包括:一个或多个第一功率余量信息,其中,第一功率余量信息为终端设备在频域资源的最大发射功率与终端设备发送第二SRS的功率之差,第二SRS包括第一SRS包括的至少一个SRS中的一个。终端设备可以上报多个SRS中每个SRS的功率余量信息。In combination with the above aspects or possible designs, in one possible design, the power headroom information includes: one or more first power headroom information, wherein the first power headroom information is a terminal device in a frequency domain resource. The difference between the maximum transmit power and the power of the second SRS transmitted by the terminal device, the second SRS including one of the at least one SRS included in the first SRS. The terminal device can report power headroom information of each SRS in multiple SRSs.
结合上述各方面或可能的设计,在一种可能的设计中,功率余量信息包括:一个或多个第二功率余量信息,其中,第二功率余量信息为终端设备在频域资源的第一最大发射功率与终端设备在第一物理信道上的功率之差,且当物理信道包括多个信道时,第一物理信道为多个信道中的一个,当物理信道包括一个信道时,第一物理信道为所述信道。终端设备可以上报物理信道中包括的每个信道的功率余量信息。In combination with the above aspects or possible designs, in one possible design, the power headroom information includes: one or more second power headroom information, wherein the second power headroom information is a terminal device in a frequency domain resource. a difference between a first maximum transmit power and a power of the terminal device on the first physical channel, and when the physical channel includes multiple channels, the first physical channel is one of a plurality of channels, and when the physical channel includes a channel, the first A physical channel is the channel. The terminal device can report power headroom information of each channel included in the physical channel.
结合上述各方面或可能的设计,在一种可能的设计中,功率余量信息包括:第三功率余量信息,其中,第三功率余量信息为终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与终端设备发送所述第一SRS的功率之差。本发明实施例可以减少上报SRS的功率余量信息的信令开销。In combination with the above aspects or possible designs, in one possible design, the power headroom information includes: third power headroom information, wherein the third power headroom information is the first of the terminal equipment in the frequency domain resource. The difference between the maximum transmit power and the power of the terminal device to transmit the first SRS. The embodiment of the present invention can reduce the signaling overhead of reporting the power headroom information of the SRS.
结合上述各方面或可能的设计,在一种可能的设计中,功率余量信息包括:第四功率余量信息,其中,第四功率余量信息为终端设备在频域资源的第一最大发射功率与终端设备在物理信道上的功率之差。本发明实施例可以减少上报物理信道的功率余量信息的信令开销。In combination with the above aspects or possible designs, in one possible design, the power headroom information includes: fourth power headroom information, wherein the fourth power headroom information is a first maximum transmission of the terminal equipment in the frequency domain resource. The difference between the power and the power of the terminal device on the physical channel. The embodiment of the invention can reduce the signaling overhead of reporting the power headroom information of the physical channel.
结合上述各方面或可能的设计,在一种可能的设计中,功率余量信息包括:第五功率余量信息,其中,第五功率余量信息为终端设备在频域资源的第一最大发射功率与第一发射功率之差,其中,第一发射功率为终端设备发送第一SRS的功率与在物理信道上的功率之和。本发明实施例可以减少上报SRS和物理信道的功率余量信息的信令开销。In combination with the above aspects or possible designs, in one possible design, the power headroom information includes: a fifth power headroom information, wherein the fifth power headroom information is a first maximum transmission of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource. The difference between the power and the first transmit power, wherein the first transmit power is the sum of the power of the first SRS transmitted by the terminal device and the power on the physical channel. The embodiment of the present invention can reduce the signaling overhead of reporting the power headroom information of the SRS and the physical channel.
结合上述各方面或可能的设计,在一种可能的设计中,功率余量信息还可以包括:一个或多个第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示第一SRS包括的至少一个SRS中的一个SRS的标识信息,第一指示信息与第一功率余量信息关联。通过上报SRS的标识信息,接入网设备可以获知终端上报了哪个或哪些SRS的功率余量信息。In combination with the foregoing aspects or possible designs, in one possible design, the power headroom information may further include: one or more first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one SRS included in the first SRS. The identification information of one SRS, the first indication information is associated with the first power headroom information. By reporting the identification information of the SRS, the access network device can know which power reserve information of the SRS or the SRS is reported by the terminal.
结合上述各方面或可能的设计,在一种可能的设计中,功率余量信息还可以包括:所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率;和/或所述终端设备发送所述第一SRS的第一最大发射功率;和/或所述终端设备在所述物理信道上的第一最大发射功率;和/或所述终端设备的第一最大发射功率。通过上报第一最大发射功率,接入网设备可以获知终端设备用于确定功率余量信息所使用的第一最大发射功率,从而有利于功率控制或资源分配。In combination with the above aspects or possible designs, in one possible design, the power headroom information may further include: a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource; and/or the terminal device sends a first maximum transmit power of the first SRS; and/or a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the physical channel; and/or a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device. By reporting the first maximum transmit power, the access network device can learn the first maximum transmit power used by the terminal device to determine the power headroom information, thereby facilitating power control or resource allocation.
结合上述各方面或可能的设计,在一种可能的设计中,当功率余量信息中包括的频域资源的第一SRS包括的多个的最大发射功率相同,功率余量信息中只包括一个第一最大发射功率,且该一个第一最大发射功率与第一SRS关联。可以节省上报第一SRS的第一最大功率的信令开销。In combination with the above aspects or possible designs, in a possible design, when the first SRS of the frequency domain resource included in the power headroom information includes the same maximum transmit power, only one of the power headroom information is included. a first maximum transmit power, and the one first maximum transmit power is associated with the first SRS. The signaling overhead of reporting the first maximum power of the first SRS may be saved.
结合上述各方面或可能的设计,在一种可能的设计中,当功率余量信息中包括的频域资源的第一SRS的第一最大发射功率与物理信道的第一最大发射功率相同,功率余量信息中可 以只包括一个第一最大发射功率,且该一个第一最大发射功率与第一SRS和物理信道关联。可以节省上报第一SRS和物理信道的第一最大功率的信令开销。In combination with the above aspects or possible designs, in a possible design, when the first maximum transmit power of the first SRS of the frequency domain resource included in the power headroom information is the same as the first maximum transmit power of the physical channel, the power The remaining information may include only one first maximum transmit power, and the one first maximum transmit power is associated with the first SRS and the physical channel. The signaling overhead of reporting the first maximum power of the first SRS and the physical channel can be saved.
结合上述各方面或可能的设计,在一种可能的设计中,功率余量信息还可以包括:第二指示信息,用于指示所述频域资源的标识信息。通过上报频域资源的标识信息,接入网设备可以获知终端上报了哪个或哪些频域资源的功率余量信息。In combination with the foregoing aspects or possible designs, in one possible design, the power headroom information may further include: second indication information, used to indicate the identifier information of the frequency domain resource. By reporting the identification information of the frequency domain resource, the access network device can know which power resource information of the frequency domain resource is reported by the terminal.
结合上述各方面或可能的设计,在一种可能的设计中,频域资源可以是,服务小区,主服务小区,辅服务小区,成员载波(Component Carrier,CC),补充上行链路(Supplementary Uplink,SUL),或频率段(BandWidth Parts,BWP)。In combination with the above aspects or possible designs, in one possible design, the frequency domain resources may be: a serving cell, a primary serving cell, a secondary serving cell, a component carrier (CC), and a supplemental uplink (Supplementary Uplink). , SUL), or BandWidth Parts (BWP).
结合上述各方面或可能的设计,在一种可能的设计中,第一时间段可以是,子帧,时隙,迷你时隙,符号,传输时间间隔。In combination with the above aspects or possible designs, in one possible design, the first time period may be a subframe, a time slot, a mini time slot, a symbol, and a transmission time interval.
第五方面,本发明实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储指令,当指令在存储器上运行时,使得处理器执行上述各方面或可能的设计的方法。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a computer readable storage medium for storing instructions that, when executed on a memory, cause the processor to perform the above aspects or possible design methods.
第六方面,本发明实施例提供一种通信装置。该通信装置包括处理器和存储器,存储器用于存储指令;处理器用于读取并执行存储器中的指令,使得通信装置执行上述各方面或可能的设计的方法。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication apparatus. The communication device includes a processor and a memory for storing instructions, and a processor for reading and executing instructions in the memory such that the communication device performs the methods of the various aspects or possible designs described above.
附图说明DRAWINGS
图1是本申请的实施例应用的移动通信系统的架构示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a mobile communication system to which an embodiment of the present application is applied.
图2是本申请实施例的终端设备的结构示意图。FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图3是本申请实施例的接入网设备的结构示意图。FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图4是本申请实施例的流程示意图。4 is a schematic flow chart of an embodiment of the present application.
图5是本申请实施例的发送SRS的时域位置的示意图。FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a time domain location of transmitting an SRS according to an embodiment of the present application.
图6是本申请实施例的功率余量信息内容1的示意图。FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the power headroom information content 1 of the embodiment of the present application.
图7是本申请实施例的功率余量信息内容2的示意图。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the power headroom information content 2 of the embodiment of the present application.
图8是本申请实施例的功率余量信息内容3的示意图。FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the power headroom information content 3 of the embodiment of the present application.
图9是本申请实施例的功率余量信息内容4的示意图。FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the power headroom information content 4 of the embodiment of the present application.
图10是本申请实施例的功率余量信息内容5的示意图。FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the power headroom information content 5 of the embodiment of the present application.
图11是本申请实施例的功率余量信息内容6的示意图。FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the power headroom information content 6 of the embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面结合本发明实施例中的附图,对本发明实施例中的技术方案进行清楚,完整的描述。需要说明的是,在不冲突的情况下,本发明各个实施例中的技术方案和特征可以互相组合。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention are clearly and completely described below in conjunction with the drawings in the embodiments of the present invention. It should be noted that, in the case of no conflict, the technical solutions and features in the various embodiments of the present invention may be combined with each other.
应理解,本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)系统、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System,UMTS)、无线局域网(wireless local area network,WLAN)等目前的通信系统,以及,尤其应用于未来的5G新空口(new radio,NR)系统或5G系统或基于正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)技术的通信系统。本申请以5G系统为例进行描述,但不限于是5G系统。本领域普通技术人员可知,随着新业务场景的出现和网络架构的演变,本发明实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。It should be understood that the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as a long term evolution (LTE) system, an LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, and an LTE time division duplex ( Time division duplex (TDD), code division multiple access (CDMA) system, Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS), wireless local area network (WLAN), and other current communication systems, And, in particular, it is applied to a future 5G new radio (NR) system or a 5G system or a communication system based on orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) technology. This application describes a 5G system as an example, but is not limited to a 5G system. The technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present invention are equally applicable to similar technical problems, as the new service scenario occurs and the network architecture evolves.
图1给出了本发明实施例所适用的一种通信系统的示例,该场景中包括接入网设备101, 终端设备111~112(为简化起见,图1中只给出了2个终端设备,但并不意味着只能有2个终端设备。事实上,可以有任意数量个终端设备),和服务小区121~122(为简化起见,图1中只给出了2个服务小区,但并不意味着只能有2个服务小区。事实上,可以有任意数量个服务小区)。接入网设备101通过服务小区121~122中的一个或多个为终端设备111~112提供服务,即终端设备111~112通过服务小区121~122中的一个或多个与接入网设备101进行通信。应理解,图1只是示意图,该通信系统中还可以包括其它网络设备,比如还可以包括核心网设备,无线中继设备和无线回传设备等(图1中未示出)。在图1所示的网络结构中,接入网设备101通过服务小区121与终端设备111进行通信,接入网设备101通过服务小区121和服务小区122与终端设备112进行通信。服务小区121和服务小区122的接入网设备101可以对应于同一个或者两个不同的物理站点(例如,宏基站和微基站),不同的站点可以进行通信。终端设备111~112可以是1)有数据需要发送的终端设备;2)需要重传数据的终端设备;3)没有上行数据的终端设备等。1 shows an example of a communication system to which the embodiment of the present invention is applied, which includes an access network device 101 and terminal devices 111 to 112 (for simplicity, only two terminal devices are shown in FIG. But does not mean that there can only be 2 terminal devices. In fact, there can be any number of terminal devices), and serving cells 121-122 (for the sake of simplicity, only two serving cells are shown in Figure 1, but It does not mean that there can only be 2 service cells. In fact, there can be any number of service cells). The access network device 101 provides services for the terminal devices 111-112 through one or more of the serving cells 121-122, that is, the terminal devices 111-112 pass through one or more of the serving cells 121-122 and the access network device 101. Communicate. It should be understood that FIG. 1 is only a schematic diagram, and other communication devices may be included in the communication system, such as core network devices, wireless relay devices, and wireless backhaul devices (not shown in FIG. 1). In the network structure shown in FIG. 1, the access network device 101 communicates with the terminal device 111 through the serving cell 121, and the access network device 101 communicates with the terminal device 112 through the serving cell 121 and the serving cell 122. The access network device 101 of the serving cell 121 and the serving cell 122 may correspond to the same or two different physical sites (e.g., macro base station and micro base station), and different stations may communicate. The terminal devices 111 to 112 may be 1) a terminal device having data to be transmitted; 2) a terminal device that needs to retransmit data; 3) a terminal device having no uplink data, and the like.
在本发明实施例中,接入网设备(例如接入网设备101)是一种部署在无线接入网中用以为终端设备提供无线通信功能的装置。所述接入网设备可以包括各种形式的无线接入网设备,宏基站,微基站(也称为小站),中继站,接入点等。接入网设备可以是GSM或CDMA中的基站(Base Transceiver Station,BTS),也可以是WCDMA中的基站(NodeB,NB),LTE或eLTE中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,eNB或e-NodeB),5G(fifth generation)中的基站gNB((next)generation NodeB),未来移动通信系统中的基站,WiFi系统中的接入节点或V2X通信中的路边单元(Road Side Unit,RSU)等,或者为上述接入网设备内部的芯片或者片上系统(System on Chip,SOC)。本申请的实施例对接入网设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。为方便描述,本申请中,接入网设备有时也称为基站,或者无线接入设备。In the embodiment of the present invention, an access network device (for example, the access network device 101) is a device deployed in a wireless access network to provide a wireless communication function for the terminal device. The access network device may include various forms of radio access network devices, macro base stations, micro base stations (also referred to as small stations), relay stations, access points, and the like. The access network device may be a Base Transceiver Station (BTS) in GSM or CDMA, or may be a base station (NodeB, NB) in WCDMA, an evolved base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or e- in LTE or eLTE). NodeB), base station gNB ((next) generation NodeB) in 5G (fifth generation), base station in future mobile communication system, access node in WiFi system or roadside unit (RSU) in V2X communication Etc., or a chip or system on chip (SOC) inside the access network device. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technologies and specific device modes adopted by the access network device. For convenience of description, in the present application, an access network device is sometimes also referred to as a base station, or a wireless access device.
在本发明实施例中,终端设备也可称之为用户设备(User Equipment,UE)、移动台(Mobile Station,MS)、移动终端(Mobile Terminal,MT)等,该终端设备可以经无线接入网(Radio Access Network,RAN)与一个或多个核心网进行通信。终端设备可以是一种具有无线收发功能的设备,可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上(如轮船等);还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。所述终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(Virtual Reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(Augmented Reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等等。为方便描述,本申请中,终端设备有时也称为UE。In the embodiment of the present invention, the terminal device may also be referred to as a user equipment (User Equipment, UE), a mobile station (Mobile Station, MS), a mobile terminal (MT), etc., and the terminal device may be wirelessly accessed. A Radio Access Network (RAN) communicates with one or more core networks. The terminal device can be a device with wireless transceiving function, which can be deployed on land, indoors or outdoors, handheld or on-board; it can also be deployed on the water surface (such as a ship, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as airplanes, balloons). And satellites, etc.). The terminal device may be a mobile phone, a tablet (Pad), a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, and industrial control ( Wireless terminal in industrial control, wireless terminal in self driving, wireless terminal in remote medical, wireless terminal in smart grid, transportation safety A wireless terminal, a wireless terminal in a smart city, a wireless terminal in a smart home, and the like. For convenience of description, in the present application, a terminal device is sometimes referred to as a UE.
在本发明实施例中,接入网设备和终端设备之间以及终端设备和终端设备之间可以通过6G兆赫(gigahertz,GHz)以下的频谱进行通信,也可以通过6GHz以上的频谱进行通信,还可以同时使用6GHz以下的频谱和6GHz以上的频谱进行通信。本申请的实施例对无线接入网设备和终端设备之间所使用的频谱资源不做限定。接入网设备和终端设备之间以及终端设备和终端设备之间可以通过授权频谱(licensed spectrum)进行通信,也可以通过免授权频谱(unlicensed spectrum)进行通信,也可以同时通过授权频谱和免授权频谱进行通信。比如,服务小区121~122可以是基于授权频谱(licensed spectrum)的服务小区,此时,接入 网设备101和终端设备111~112可以通过在授权频谱上进行数据通信,服务小区121~122中的一部分或全部服务小区可以是基于免授权频谱(unlicensed spectrum)的服务小区,此时,接入网设备101和终端设备111~112可以通过在免授权频谱(unlicensed spectrum)上进行数据通信。上述使用授权频谱或非授权频谱的场景可以是单服务小区的通信系统,载波聚合(Carrier Aggregation,CA)的通信系统,大量载波聚合(Massive Carrier Aggregation,MCA)的通信系统,双连接(Dual Connectivity,DC)的通信系统,多连接(Multiple Connectivity,MC)的通信系统,协作多点传输(coordinated multiple point transmission,CoMP)的通信系统,NR-NRDC,Multi-RAT(Radio Access Network)DC(MRDC),5G通信系统或未来通信系统中使用授权频谱的通信系统。上述场景还可以是LTE系统中的LAA、eLAA、FeLAA系统、5G通信系统或未来通信系统中使用免授权频谱(unlicensed spectrum)(例如5150-5350MHz)的通信系统、独立工作在免授权频谱(unlicensed spectrum)的系统如MultiFire系统等。In the embodiment of the present invention, the access network device and the terminal device and the terminal device and the terminal device can communicate through a spectrum below 6G megahertz (GHz), or can communicate through a spectrum above 6 GHz. It is possible to simultaneously use a spectrum below 6 GHz and a spectrum above 6 GHz for communication. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the spectrum resources used between the radio access network device and the terminal device. The access network device and the terminal device and between the terminal device and the terminal device can communicate through a licensed spectrum, or can communicate through an unlicensed spectrum, or can simultaneously pass the licensed spectrum and the license-free. The spectrum communicates. For example, the serving cells 121-122 may be serving cells based on a licensed spectrum. In this case, the access network device 101 and the terminal devices 111-112 may perform data communication on the licensed spectrum, in the serving cells 121-122. Some or all of the serving cells may be serving cells based on an unlicensed spectrum. At this time, the access network device 101 and the terminal devices 111 to 112 may perform data communication on an unlicensed spectrum. The above scenario of using the licensed spectrum or the unlicensed spectrum may be a single-cell communication system, a carrier aggregation (CA) communication system, a Mass Carrier Aggregation (MCA) communication system, and dual connectivity (Dual Connectivity). , DC) communication system, Multiple Connectivity (MC) communication system, coordinated multiple point transmission (CoMP) communication system, NR-NRDC, Multi-RAT (Radio Access Network) DC (MRDC) ), a communication system that uses licensed spectrum in a 5G communication system or a future communication system. The above scenario may also be a LAA, eLAA, FeLAA system, 5G communication system in an LTE system, or a communication system using an unlicensed spectrum (eg, 5150-5350 MHz) in a future communication system, working independently in an unlicensed spectrum (unlicensed) Spectrum) systems such as the MultiFire system.
在本发明实施例中,服务小区121~122中的一个或多个可以替换为主服务小区,辅服务小区,成员载波(Component Carrier,CC),补充上行链路(Supplementary Uplink,SUL),或频率段(BandWidth Parts,BWP)。In the embodiment of the present invention, one or more of the serving cells 121-122 may be replaced by a primary serving cell, a secondary serving cell, a component carrier (CC), a supplementary uplink (SUL), or BandWidth Parts (BWP).
为了便于理解,下面对SUL和BWP进行描述。For ease of understanding, SUL and BWP are described below.
SUL:NR中频谱的使用会拓展到更高的频段,如C-band乃至更高的频段。但是高频段的数据传输会有较大的路径衰减和较差的覆盖范围。对于下行链路,由于接入网设备有较大的发射功率,较强的射频器件和较多的天线,高频数据通道的衰减问题可以得到缓解。但是对于上行链路,由于终端设备的能力有限,覆盖范围小的问题比较难以解决。因此,NR中提出了SUL的设计,即在原有高频链路的基础上,补充低频链路来提高上行链路的可靠性和覆盖范围。SUL: The use of spectrum in NR will extend to higher frequency bands, such as C-band and higher. However, data transmission in the high frequency band has a large path attenuation and poor coverage. For the downlink, because the access network equipment has a large transmission power, a strong RF device and more antennas, the attenuation problem of the high frequency data channel can be alleviated. However, for the uplink, due to the limited capabilities of the terminal device, the problem of small coverage is difficult to solve. Therefore, the design of SUL is proposed in NR, which is to supplement the low frequency link to improve the reliability and coverage of the uplink based on the original high frequency link.
BWP:为了适应高频传输的高带宽,高频率,不同的空口格式以及更高的终端设备的能力要求,NR中引入了BWP的概念,主要应用场景包括以下场景中的至少一项:(1)支持终端设备更小的带宽能力;(2)通过改变带宽较少终端设备的能耗;(3)支持不同基础参数集(numerology)的频分复用;(4)支持非连续频谱;(5)支持前向兼容。BWP: In order to adapt to the high bandwidth of high frequency transmission, high frequency, different air interface formats and higher terminal equipment capability requirements, the concept of BWP is introduced in NR. The main application scenarios include at least one of the following scenarios: (1) Supporting the smaller bandwidth capability of the terminal equipment; (2) by changing the energy consumption of the terminal equipment with less bandwidth; (3) supporting the frequency division multiplexing of different basic parameter sets (numerology); (4) supporting the discontinuous spectrum; 5) Support for forward compatibility.
图2示出了本发明实施例提供的一种无线通信设备,该无线通信装设备可以作为终端设备111~112或者应用于终端设备111~112中的装置。以下以图2所示的无线通信设备为终端设备为例进行说明。该终端设备能够执行本发明实施例提供的方法。该终端设备可以是2个终端设备111~112中的任一个。所述终端设备包括收发器201、用于实现无线通信功能的处理器204和存储器203。FIG. 2 shows a wireless communication device according to an embodiment of the present invention. The wireless communication device can be used as the terminal devices 111-112 or applied to the devices in the terminal devices 111-112. Hereinafter, the wireless communication device shown in FIG. 2 will be described as an example of the terminal device. The terminal device is capable of performing the method provided by the embodiment of the present invention. The terminal device may be any one of the two terminal devices 111 to 112. The terminal device includes a transceiver 201, a processor 204 for implementing a wireless communication function, and a memory 203.
收发器201可以用于支持终端设备111~112与接入网设备101之间收发信息。在下行链路,来自接入网设备的下行链路射频信号经由天线接收,由收发器201进行调解,提取基带信号并输出至处理器204进行处理,来恢复接入网设备所发送的业务数据和/或信令信息。在上行链路上,承载着将要向接入网设备发送的业务数据和/或信令消息的基带信号由收发器201进行调制,来产生上行链路的射频信号,并经由天线发射给接入网设备。收发器201还可以用于支持终端设备111~112之间收发信息。收发器201可以包括独立的接收器和发送器电路,也可以集成在同一个电路实现收发功能。The transceiver 201 can be used to support the transmission and reception of information between the terminal devices 111-112 and the access network device 101. On the downlink, the downlink radio frequency signal from the access network device is received via the antenna, coordinated by the transceiver 201, and the baseband signal is extracted and output to the processor 204 for processing to recover the service data sent by the access network device. And / or signaling information. On the uplink, the baseband signal carrying the traffic data and/or signaling messages to be transmitted to the access network device is modulated by the transceiver 201 to generate an uplink radio frequency signal and transmitted to the access via the antenna. Network equipment. The transceiver 201 can also be used to support the transmission and reception of information between the terminal devices 111-112. The transceiver 201 can include independent receiver and transmitter circuits, or can be integrated in the same circuit to implement transceiving functions.
处理器204可以是调制解调器处理器(modem processor)。处理器204可包括基带处理器(baseband processor,BBP),该基带处理器处理经数字化的收到信号以提取该信号中承 载的信息或数据比特。为此目的,BBP通常由处理器204内的一个或多个数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)中或由分开的集成电路(integrated circuit,IC)来实现。 Processor 204 can be a modem processor. Processor 204 can include a baseband processor (BBP) that processes the digitized received signal to extract information or data bits carried in the signal. For this purpose, the BBP is typically implemented by one or more digital signal processors (DSPs) within the processor 204 or by separate integrated circuits (ICs).
例如,如图2所示,处理器204可包括编码器2041,调制器2042,解码器2043,解调器2044。编码器2041用于对待发送信号进行编码。例如,编码器2041可用于接收要在上行链路上(或边链路上)发送的业务数据和/或信令消息,并对业务数据和信令消息进行处理(例如,格式化、编码、或交织等)。调制器2042用于对编码器2041的输出信号进行调制。例如,调制器可对编码器的输出信号(数据和/或信令)进行符号映射和/或调制等处理,并提供输出采样。解调器2044用于对输入信号进行解调处理。例如,解调器2044处理输入采样并提供符号估计。解码器2043用于对解调后的输入信号进行解码。例如,解码器2043对解调后的输入信号解交织、和/或解码等处理,并输出解码后的信号(数据和/或信令)。For example, as shown in FIG. 2, processor 204 can include an encoder 2041, a modulator 2042, a decoder 2043, and a demodulator 2044. The encoder 2041 is for encoding the signal to be transmitted. For example, the encoder 2041 can be configured to receive traffic data and/or signaling messages to be transmitted on the uplink (or on the side link) and process the traffic data and signaling messages (eg, format, encode, Or intertwined, etc.). Modulator 2042 is used to modulate the output signal of encoder 2041. For example, the modulator can perform symbol mapping and/or modulation processing on the encoder's output signals (data and/or signaling) and provide output samples. A demodulator 2044 is used to demodulate the input signal. For example, demodulator 2044 processes the input samples and provides symbol estimates. The decoder 2043 is configured to decode the demodulated input signal. For example, the decoder 2043 de-interleaves, and/or decodes the demodulated input signal and outputs the decoded signal (data and/or signaling).
处理器204接收可表示语音、数据或控制信息的数字化数据,并对这些数字化数据处理后以供传输。处理器204可以支持多种通信系统的多种无线通信协议中的一种或多种,例如长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)通信系统,新空口(New Radio,NR),通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunications System,UMTS),高速分组接入(High Speed Packet Access,HSPA)等等。可选的,处理器204中也可以包括一个或多个存储器。The processor 204 receives digitized data representative of voice, data or control information and processes the digitized data for transmission. The processor 204 can support one or more of a plurality of wireless communication protocols of a plurality of communication systems, such as a Long Term Evolution (LTE) communication system, a New Radio (NR), and a universal mobile communication system ( Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) and the like. Optionally, one or more memories may also be included in the processor 204.
存储器203用于存储用于支持所述终端设备通信的程序代码(有时也称为程序,指令,软件等)和/或数据。The memory 203 is used to store program codes (sometimes referred to as programs, instructions, software, etc.) and/or data for supporting communication of the terminal device.
需要说明的是,存储器203可以包括一个或多个存储单元,例如,可以是处理器204或应用处理器202内部的存储单元,或者可以是与处理器204或应用处理器202独立的外部存储单元,或者还可以是包括处理器204或应用处理器202内部的存储单元以及与处理器204或应用处理器202独立的外部存储单元的部件。It should be noted that the memory 203 may include one or more storage units, for example, may be the storage unit inside the processor 204 or the application processor 202, or may be an external storage unit independent of the processor 204 or the application processor 202. Or it may be a component that includes a memory unit internal to processor 204 or application processor 202 and an external memory unit that is separate from processor 204 or application processor 202.
终端设备还可以包括应用处理器(application processor)202,用于生成上述的可表示语音、数据或控制信息的数字化数据。处理器204和应用处理器202可以是集成在一个处理器芯片中。The terminal device may also include an application processor 202 for generating digitized data representative of voice, data or control information as described above. Processor 204 and application processor 202 may be integrated into one processor chip.
图3示出了本发明实施例提供的一种无线通信设备,该无线通信装设备可以作为接入网设备101或者应用于接入网设备101中的装置。以下以图2所示的无线通信设备为接入网设备为例进行说明。该接入网设备能够执行本发明实施例提供的方法。所述接入网设备包括收发器302,控制器或处理器301(下文以处理器301为例进行说明)和存储器303。FIG. 3 shows a wireless communication device according to an embodiment of the present invention. The wireless communication device can be used as an access network device 101 or a device applied to the access network device 101. The following is an example in which the wireless communication device shown in FIG. 2 is an access network device. The access network device is capable of performing the method provided by the embodiment of the present invention. The access network device includes a transceiver 302, a controller or processor 301 (hereinafter, exemplified by processor 301) and a memory 303.
收发器302可以用于支持接入网设备101与终端设备111~112之间收发信息。在上行链路,来自终端设备的上行链路射频信号经由天线接收,由收发器302进行调解,提取基带信号并输出至处理器301进行处理,来恢复终端设备所发送的业务数据和/或信令信息。在下行链路上,承载着将要向终端设备发送的业务数据和/或信令消息的基带信号由处理器301进行调制,来产生上行链路的射频信号,并经由天线发射给接入网设备。收发器302还可以用于支持终端设备111~112之间收发信息。收发器302可以包括独立的接收器和发送器电路,也可以集成在同一个电路实现收发功能。The transceiver 302 can be used to support the transmission and reception of information between the access network device 101 and the terminal devices 111-112. On the uplink, the uplink radio frequency signal from the terminal device is received via the antenna, coordinated by the transceiver 302, and the baseband signal is extracted and output to the processor 301 for processing to recover the service data and/or information sent by the terminal device. Order information. On the downlink, the baseband signal carrying the service data and/or signaling message to be transmitted to the terminal device is modulated by the processor 301 to generate an uplink radio frequency signal and transmitted to the access network device via the antenna. . The transceiver 302 can also be used to support the transmission and reception of information between the terminal devices 111-112. The transceiver 302 can include separate receiver and transmitter circuits, or can be integrated in the same circuit for transceiving functions.
处理器301有时也称为调制解调器处理器(modem processor)。处理器301可包括基带处理器(baseband processor,BBP)(图3中未示出),该基带处理器处理经数字化的收到信号以提取该信号中传达的信息或数据比特。如此,BBP通常按需或按期望实现在处理器301内的一个或多个数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)中或实现为分开的集成电 路(integrated circuit,IC)。 Processor 301 is also sometimes referred to as a modem processor. Processor 301 can include a baseband processor (BBP) (not shown in FIG. 3) that processes the digitized received signal to extract information or data bits conveyed in the signal. As such, the BBP is typically implemented in one or more digital signal processors (DSPs) within the processor 301 or as separate integrated circuits (ICs) as needed or desired.
存储器303用于存储用于支持所述接入网设备通信的程序代码(有时也称为程序,指令,软件等)和/或数据。 Memory 303 is used to store program code (sometimes referred to as programs, instructions, software, etc.) and/or data for supporting communication by the access network device.
需要说明的是,存储器303可以包括一个或多个存储单元,例如,可以是处理器301内部的存储单元,或者可以是与处理器301独立的外部存储单元,或者还可以是包括处理器301内部的存储单元以及与处理器301独立的外部存储单元的部件。It should be noted that the memory 303 may include one or more storage units, for example, may be a storage unit inside the processor 301, or may be an external storage unit independent of the processor 301, or may also include an internal processor 301. The storage unit and the components of the external storage unit independent of the processor 301.
接入网设备还101可以包括通信单元304,用于支持接入网设备101与其它网络实体进行通信。例如,用于支持接入网设备101与核心网的网络设备等进行通信。The access network device 101 can also include a communication unit 304 for supporting the access network device 101 to communicate with other network entities. For example, it is used to support the access network device 101 to communicate with a network device or the like of the core network.
可选的,接入网设备101还可以包括总线。其中,收发器302、存储器303以及通信单元304可以通过总线与处理器301连接。例如,总线可以是外设部件互连标准(Peripheral Component Interconnect,PCI)总线或扩展工作标准结构(Extended Industry Standard Architecture,EISA)总线等。所述总线可以包括地址总线、数据总线、以及控制总线等。Optionally, the access network device 101 may further include a bus. The transceiver 302, the memory 303, and the communication unit 304 can be connected to the processor 301 through a bus. For example, the bus can be a Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus or an Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) bus. The bus may include an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like.
处理器204和处理器301可以是相同类型的处理器,也可以是不同类型的处理器。例如可以实现在中央处理器(Central Processing Unit,CPU),通用处理器,数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP),专用集成电路(Application-Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC),现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件、其他集成电路、或者其任意组合。处理器204和处理器301可以实现或执行结合本发明实施例公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。处理器204和处理器301也可以是实现计算功能器件的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合,DSP和微处理器的组合或者片上系统(system-on-a-chip,SOC)等等。The processor 204 and the processor 301 may be the same type of processor or different types of processors. For example, it can be implemented in a central processing unit (CPU), a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), and a field programmable gate array ( Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, other integrated circuit, or any combination thereof. The processor 204 and the processor 301 can implement or perform various exemplary logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with the present disclosure. The processor 204 and the processor 301 may also be a combination of computing function devices, for example, including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, or a system-on-a-chip (SOC), etc. Wait.
本领域技术人员能够理解,结合本申请所公开的诸方面描述的各种解说性逻辑块、模块、电路和算法可被实现为电子硬件、存储在存储器中或另一计算机可读介质中并由处理器或其它处理设备执行的指令、或这两者的组合。作为示例,本文中描述的设备可用在任何电路、硬件组件、IC、或IC芯片中。本申请所公开的存储器可以是任何类型和大小的存储器,且可被配置成存储所需的任何类型的信息。为清楚地解说这种可互换性,以上已经以其功能性的形式一般地描述了各种解说性组件、框、模块、电路和步骤。此类功能性如何被实现取决于具体应用、设计选择和/或加诸于整体系统上的设计约束。本领域技术人员可针对每种特定应用以不同方式来实现所描述的功能性,但此类实现决策不应被解读为致使脱离本发明各实施例的范围。Those skilled in the art can appreciate that the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, circuits, and algorithms described in connection with the aspects disclosed herein can be implemented as electronic hardware, stored in a memory, or in another computer-readable medium and An instruction executed by a processor or other processing device, or a combination of the two. By way of example, the devices described herein can be used in any circuit, hardware component, IC, or IC chip. The memory disclosed herein can be any type and size of memory and can be configured to store any type of information as desired. To clearly illustrate this interchangeability, various illustrative components, blocks, modules, circuits, and steps have been described. How such functionality is implemented depends on the specific application, design choices, and/or design constraints imposed on the overall system. A person skilled in the art can implement the described functionality in a different manner for each particular application, but such implementation decisions should not be interpreted as causing a departure from the scope of the embodiments of the invention.
为了便于理解,下面对PHR进行描述。For ease of understanding, the PHR is described below.
PHR是由至少一个功率余量(Power Headroom,PH)组成的媒体接入控制(Media Access Control,MAC)控制单元(Control Element,CE)。在LTE中,每个PH对应一个激活的服务小区(Activated Serving Cell)。PH表示终端设备在一个服务小区上允许的最大发射功率与终端设备在该服务小区上估计的发射功率(Estimated Transmission Power)的差值。终端设备上报PH给接入网设备以通知终端设备的功率余量信息,以便接入网设备为所述终端设备进行合理的资源分配和/或功率控制。The PHR is a Media Access Control (MAC) Control Element (CE) composed of at least one Power Headroom (PH). In LTE, each PH corresponds to an activated serving cell (Activated Serving Cell). PH represents the difference between the maximum transmit power allowed by the terminal device on one serving cell and the estimated transmit power (Estimated Transmission Power) of the terminal device on the serving cell. The terminal device reports the PH to the access network device to notify the terminal device of the power headroom information, so that the access network device performs reasonable resource allocation and/or power control for the terminal device.
具体的,在LTE系统中,有三种PH格式(Type),分别是:Specifically, in the LTE system, there are three PH formats (Type), which are:
Type1:表示终端设备在一个服务小区上允许的最大发射功率与终端设备发送物理上行共享信道(Physical Uplink Shared CHannel,PUSCH)功率的差值。比如,当计算服务小区c子帧i的PH的时候,只考虑发送PUSCH的功率,其中,c表示服务小区的编号,i表示子帧的编号。需要说明的是,PUSCH是物理信道,其对应的传输信道是上行共享(Uplink Shared  Channel,UL-SCH)。因此,Type 1 PH也可以表示终端设备在一个服务小区上允许的最大发射功率与终端设备在该服务小区上发送UL-SCH的功率的差值。需要说明的是,终端设备发送PUSCH的功率是终端设备为发送PUSCH所估计的发射功率(Estimated Transmission Power),该估计的发功率有可能与实际发送所述PUSCH的功率相同,也可能与实际发送所述PUSCH的功率不同。Type1: indicates the difference between the maximum transmit power allowed by the terminal device on a serving cell and the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) power of the terminal device. For example, when calculating the PH of the serving cell c subframe i, only the power of the PUSCH is considered, where c denotes the number of the serving cell and i denotes the number of the subframe. It should be noted that the PUSCH is a physical channel, and the corresponding transport channel is an uplink shared channel (UL-SCH). Therefore, the Type 1 PH may also represent the difference between the maximum transmit power allowed by the terminal device on one serving cell and the power of the terminal device transmitting the UL-SCH on the serving cell. It should be noted that the power of the PUSCH transmitted by the terminal device is the estimated transmit power (the estimated transmit power) of the terminal device, and the estimated transmit power may be the same as the actual transmit power of the PUSCH, and may also be sent with the actual transmission. The power of the PUSCH is different.
Type2:表示终端设备在一个服务小区上允许的最大发射功率与终端设备在该服务小区上发送PUSCH和物理上行控制信道(Physical Uplink Control Channel,PUCCH)的功率的差值。比如,当计算服务小区c子帧i的PH的时候,考虑发送PUSCH和PUCCH的功率。Type 2 PH也可以表示终端设备在一个服务小区上允许的最大发射功率与终端设备在该服务小区上发送UL-SCH和PUCCH的功率的差值。需要说明的是,终端设备发送PUSCH和PUCCH的功率是终端设备为发送PUSCH和PUCCH所估计的发射功率,上述终端设备发送SRS的功率是终端设备为发送SRS所估计的发射功率。Type 2: indicates the difference between the maximum transmit power allowed by the terminal device on a serving cell and the power of the terminal device to transmit the PUSCH and the Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) on the serving cell. For example, when calculating the PH of the serving cell c subframe i, consider the power of transmitting the PUSCH and the PUCCH. The Type 2 PH may also indicate the difference between the maximum transmit power allowed by the terminal device on one serving cell and the power of the terminal device transmitting the UL-SCH and PUCCH on the serving cell. It should be noted that the power of the terminal device to transmit the PUSCH and the PUCCH is the transmit power estimated by the terminal device for transmitting the PUSCH and the PUCCH, and the power of the terminal device for transmitting the SRS is the transmit power estimated by the terminal device for transmitting the SRS.
Type3:表示终端设备在一个服务小区上允许的最大发射功率与终端设备在该服务小区上发送参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS)的功率的差值。比如,当计算服务小区c子帧i的PH的时候,考虑发射SRS的功率。在LTE系统中,当且仅当终端设备的服务小区为辅服务小区(Secondary Cell,Scell)且该服务小区被配置为只能发送侦听参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS)时,终端设备可以通过Type3 PH上报该服务小区的SRS的PH。当终端设备在主服务小区(Primary Cell,PCell)或SCell上既可以发送PUSCH,又可以发送SRS时,终端设备只能发送Type1 PH。当终端设备在PCell或SCell上既可以发送PUSCH和PUCCH,又可以发送SRS时,终端设备只能发送Type1 PH和Type2 PH。Type 3: indicates the difference between the maximum transmit power allowed by the terminal device on a serving cell and the power of the terminal device to transmit a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) on the serving cell. For example, when calculating the PH of the serving cell c subframe i, consider the power of transmitting the SRS. In the LTE system, if and only if the serving cell of the terminal device is a secondary cell (Scell) and the serving cell is configured to transmit only a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS), the terminal device may The PH of the SRS of the serving cell is reported by the Type3 PH. When the terminal device can send both the PUSCH and the SRS on the primary cell (PCell) or the SCell, the terminal device can only send the Type1 PH. When the terminal device can transmit both the PUSCH and the PUCCH on the PCell or the SCell, and the SRS can be sent, the terminal device can only send the Type1 PH and the Type2 PH.
需要说明的是,当有多个服务小区时,终端设备在多个服务小区上估计的发射功率的总和可能会超过终端设备的最大发射功率,因此终端设备还会对估计的发射功率进行调整,使得发射功率满足终端设备最大发射功率的要求。It should be noted that when there are multiple serving cells, the sum of the estimated transmit powers of the terminal devices on multiple serving cells may exceed the maximum transmit power of the terminal device, so the terminal device may also adjust the estimated transmit power. The transmission power is made to meet the requirements of the maximum transmission power of the terminal device.
在LTE系统中,接入网设备与终端设备通信时,对发送SRS的功率控制和对发送PUSCH的功率控制是相互绑定(或关联)的,采用上述现有PH技术方案是可以支持对发送SRS和发送PUSCH进行绑定的功率控制。但是,在5GNR系统中,接入网设备与终端设备通信时,需要对发送SRS和发送PUSCH分别进行功率控制。即对发送SRS的功率控制和对发送PUSCH的功率控制相互独立。此时,采用现有PH技术方案,接入网设备无法将SRS的功率余量与PUSCH的功率余量相对准确地互相换算,因此无法实现对SRS和PUSCH分别进行功率控制。从而,影响功率控制的精度和资源分配性能。In the LTE system, when the access network device communicates with the terminal device, the power control for transmitting the SRS and the power control for transmitting the PUSCH are mutually bound (or associated), and the existing PH technology solution can support the transmission. The SRS and the PUSCH transmit power control for binding. However, in the 5GNR system, when the access network device communicates with the terminal device, power control needs to be performed separately for transmitting the SRS and transmitting the PUSCH. That is, the power control for transmitting the SRS and the power control for transmitting the PUSCH are independent of each other. In this case, with the existing PH technology scheme, the access network device cannot mutually convert the power headroom of the SRS and the power headroom of the PUSCH to each other relatively accurately. Therefore, power control of the SRS and the PUSCH cannot be performed separately. Thereby, the accuracy of power control and resource allocation performance are affected.
为了解决上述问题,本发明提供了一种无线通信方法。该方法中,接入网设备为终端设备在服务小区上配置至少一个SRS。终端设备根据该至少一个SRS中的部分或全部以及一个或多个物理信道来确定该服务小区的功率余量信息,并将所述功率余量信息发送给接入网设备。以使得接入网设备获得终端设备在该服务小区的更精确的功率余量信息,从而提升功率控制的精度和资源分配性能。In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a wireless communication method. In the method, the access network device configures at least one SRS on the serving cell for the terminal device. The terminal device determines power headroom information of the serving cell according to part or all of the at least one SRS and one or more physical channels, and sends the power headroom information to the access network device. The access network device obtains more accurate power headroom information of the terminal device in the serving cell, thereby improving power control accuracy and resource allocation performance.
需要说明的是,在本发明各实施例中,服务小区,还可以是主服务小区(Primary Cell,PCell),辅服务小区(Secondary Cell,SCell),主辅助小区(Primary Secondary Cell,PScell)成员载波(Component Carrier,CC),补充上行链路(Supplementary Uplink,SUL),或频率段(BandWidth Parts,BWP)。等。在本发明实施例中,统称为频域资源。相应的,一个服务小区的功率余量PH也可以替换成一个BWP的PH,或者替换成一个CC的PH,或者替换成一个SUL的PH等。It should be noted that, in the embodiments of the present invention, the serving cell may also be a primary cell (PCell), a secondary cell (SCell), and a primary secondary cell (PScell). Component Carrier (CC), Supplementary Uplink (SUL), or BandWidth Parts (BWP). Wait. In the embodiment of the present invention, they are collectively referred to as frequency domain resources. Correspondingly, the power headroom PH of a serving cell can also be replaced by the PH of a BWP, or replaced by the PH of a CC, or replaced by the PH of a SUL.
在终端设备确定一个服务小区上的PH时,使用的在该服务小区上允许的最大发射功率是由终端设备确定的在该服务小区上允许的最大发射功率。具体的,终端设备根据终端设备的 最大发射功率能力、接入网设备通知的在该服务小区的最大发射功率、功率回退中的至少一项确定的。比如,终端的最大发射功率能力为23分贝毫瓦(dBm),接入网设备通知的在一个服务小区的最大发射功率为20dBm,功率回退2dB,则终端设备在该服务小区上允许的最大发射功率等于18dBm。为了方便描述,在本发明各实施例中,终端设备确定的在服务小区上的最大发射功率也称为在服务小区上的第一最大发射功率。相应的,终端设备确定的在一个BWP上允许的最大发射功率也称为在BWP上的第一最大发射功率。终端设备确定的在一个SUL上允许的最大发射功率也称为在SUL上的第一最大发射功率,终端设备确定的在一个频域资源上允许的最大发射功率也称为在频域资源上的第一最大发射功率等。相对应的,接入网设备通知的最大发射功率也称为第二最大发射功率。比如,接入网设备通知的终端设备在一个服务小区的最大发射功率也称为终端设备在服务小区的第二最大发射功率。接入网设备通知的终端设备在一个BWP的最大发射功率也称为终端设备在BWP的第二最大发射功率。接入网设备通知的终端设备在一个频域资源的最大发射功率也称为终端设备在频域资源的第二最大发射功率等。When the terminal device determines the PH on a serving cell, the maximum transmit power allowed on the serving cell is the maximum transmit power allowed on the serving cell determined by the terminal device. Specifically, the terminal device is determined according to at least one of a maximum transmit power capability of the terminal device, a maximum transmit power of the serving cell, and a power backoff notified by the access network device. For example, the maximum transmit power capability of the terminal is 23 decibels milliwatts (dBm), and the maximum transmit power of a serving cell notified by the access network device is 20 dBm, and the power backoff is 2 dB, and the maximum allowed by the terminal device on the serving cell. The transmit power is equal to 18 dBm. For convenience of description, in various embodiments of the present invention, the maximum transmit power determined by the terminal device on the serving cell is also referred to as the first maximum transmit power on the serving cell. Correspondingly, the maximum transmit power allowed on the BWP determined by the terminal device is also referred to as the first maximum transmit power on the BWP. The maximum transmit power allowed on the SUL determined by the terminal device is also referred to as the first maximum transmit power on the SUL, and the maximum transmit power allowed by the terminal device on one frequency domain resource is also referred to as being on the frequency domain resource. The first maximum transmission power and the like. Correspondingly, the maximum transmit power notified by the access network device is also referred to as the second maximum transmit power. For example, the maximum transmit power of the terminal device notified by the access network device in one serving cell is also referred to as the second maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the serving cell. The maximum transmit power of the terminal device notified by the access network device at one BWP is also referred to as the second maximum transmit power of the terminal device at the BWP. The maximum transmit power of the terminal device notified by the access network device in one frequency domain resource is also referred to as the second maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource.
相应的,在本发明各个实施例中,一个BWP的PH表示终端设备在一个BWP上第一最大发射功率与终端设备在该BWP上估计的发射功率(Estimated Transmission Power)的差值。一个CC的PH表示终端设备在一个CC上的第一最大发射功率与终端设备在该CC上估计的发射功率(Estimated Transmission Power)的差值。一个SUL的PH表示终端设备在一个SUL上的第一最大发射功率与终端设备在该SUL上估计的发射功率(Estimated Transmission Power)的差值。一个频域资源的PH表示终端设备在一个频域资源上的第一最大发射功率与终端设备在该频域资源上估计的发射功率(Estimated Transmission Power)的差值等。Correspondingly, in various embodiments of the present invention, the PH of one BWP represents the difference between the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on one BWP and the estimated transmit power (Estimated Transmission Power) of the terminal device on the BWP. The PH of one CC represents the difference between the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on one CC and the estimated transmit power (Estimated Transmission Power) of the terminal device on the CC. The PH of one SUL represents the difference between the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on one SUL and the estimated transmit power (Estimated Transmission Power) of the terminal device on the SUL. The PH of a frequency domain resource indicates the difference between the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on one frequency domain resource and the estimated transmit power (Estimated Transmission Power) of the terminal device on the frequency domain resource.
图4示出了一种本发明实施例提供的一种无线通信方法的流程示意图。FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a wireless communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
本发明各实施例中的终端设备可以是图1中终端设备111~112中的任意一个。The terminal device in each embodiment of the present invention may be any one of the terminal devices 111 to 112 in FIG.
本发明实施例包括如下步骤:Embodiments of the present invention include the following steps:
步骤S101,接入网设备向终端设备发送第一配置信息;相应的,终端设备从接入网设备接收第一配置信息。Step S101: The access network device sends the first configuration information to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first configuration information from the access network device.
第一配置信息用于配置频域资源的至少一个侦听参考信号(SRS)。The first configuration information is used to configure at least one Listening Reference Signal (SRS) of the frequency domain resource.
可替换的,所述至少一个SRS可以替换成至少一组SRS,其中每组SRS包括至少一个SRS。此时,本发明实施例中针对至少一个SRS的操作,比如确定第一SRS,确定功率余量信息,上报功率余量信息等,均是以一组SRS为单位。Alternatively, the at least one SRS may be replaced with at least one set of SRSs, wherein each set of SRSs includes at least one SRS. At this time, in the embodiment of the present invention, the operations of the at least one SRS, such as determining the first SRS, determining the power headroom information, reporting the power headroom information, and the like, are all in units of a set of SRSs.
在本发明各实施例中,频域资源可以是:服务小区(Serving Cell),主服务小区(Primary Cell,PCell),辅服务小区(Secondary Cell,SCell),主辅助小区(Primary Secondary Cell,PScell)成员载波(Component Carrier,CC),补充上行链路(Supplementary Uplink,SUL),或频率段(BandWidth Parts,BWP)。该频域资源可以是授权频谱的频域资源,也可以是免授权频谱的频域资源。本发明不作限制。终端设备在配置的频域资源上,可以发送配置的至少一个SRS。进一步的终端设备在配置的频域资源上,还可以发送PUSCH(即在PUSCH上发送信息),和/或PUCCH(即在PUCCH发送信息)。In the embodiments of the present invention, the frequency domain resource may be: a serving cell (Serving Cell), a primary serving cell (Primary Cell, PCell), a secondary serving cell (Secondary Cell, SCell), and a primary secondary cell (Primary Secondary Cell, PScell). ) Component Carrier (CC), Supplementary Uplink (SUL), or BandWidth Parts (BWP). The frequency domain resource may be a frequency domain resource of the licensed spectrum or a frequency domain resource of the unlicensed spectrum. The invention is not limited. The terminal device can send the configured at least one SRS on the configured frequency domain resource. Further terminal devices may also transmit PUSCH (ie, transmit information on the PUSCH) and/or PUCCH (ie, transmit information on the PUCCH) on the configured frequency domain resources.
具体的,第一配置信息包括如下至少一项:Specifically, the first configuration information includes at least one of the following:
信息11:用于指示所述至少一个SRS的发送方式的指示信息,其中,所述发送方式包括:非周期性的发送方式,或半静态发送方式,或周期性的发送方式。Information 11: indication information for indicating a sending manner of the at least one SRS, where the sending manner includes: an aperiodic transmission mode, or a semi-static transmission mode, or a periodic transmission mode.
具体的,如果SRS的发送方式为非周期性的发送方式,终端设备只有在接收到接入网设 备的命令后,才向接入网设备发送一次SRS。比如,接入网设备通过物理下行控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel,PDCCH)通知UE发送一次SRS。所述一次SRS可以包含多个SRS资源,可以占据多个OFDM符号。如果SRS的发送方式为半静态的发送方式,终端设备在接收到接入网设备的激活命令,比如,MAC控制元素(MACControl Element,MACCE)后,根据预配置的周期向接入网设备周期性的发送SRS,当终端设备接收到接入网设备的去激活(或释放)命令,比如,MACCE后,停止向接入网设备发送SRS。所述SRS在激活与去激活的期间可以被多次发送。如果SRS的发送方式为周期性的发送方式,则终端设备根据预配置的周期向接入网设备周期性的发送SRS。Specifically, if the SRS is sent in an aperiodic manner, the terminal device sends the SRS to the access network device only after receiving the command of the access network device. For example, the access network device notifies the UE to send an SRS once through a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH). The primary SRS may include multiple SRS resources and may occupy multiple OFDM symbols. If the sending mode of the SRS is a semi-static transmission mode, the terminal device periodically sends an access command to the access network device according to a pre-configured period after receiving an activation command of the access network device, for example, a MAC Control Element (MACCE). The SRS is sent, and when the terminal device receives the deactivation (or release) command of the access network device, for example, the MACCE, stops sending the SRS to the access network device. The SRS may be transmitted multiple times during activation and deactivation. If the sending mode of the SRS is a periodic sending mode, the terminal device periodically sends the SRS to the access network device according to the pre-configured period.
可选的,当发送方式为周期性的或半静态的发送方式时,第一配置信息中还可以携带周期信息。比如,周期长度为10毫秒,或2个子帧,或5个时隙,或5个OFDM符号等。Optionally, when the sending mode is a periodic or semi-static sending mode, the first configuration information may further carry the periodic information. For example, the period length is 10 milliseconds, or 2 subframes, or 5 slots, or 5 OFDM symbols, and the like.
信息12:用于指示所述至少一个SRS的功能的指示信息,其中所述功能包括:用于基于码本(CodeBook)的传输,和/或用于基于非码本的传输,和/或用于SRS切换(Switching),和/或用于波束管理。Information 12: indication information for indicating a function of the at least one SRS, wherein the function comprises: for codebook based transmission, and/or for non-codebook based transmission, and/or Switching on SRS, and/or for beam management.
信息13:所述至少一个SRS的时域位置信息。Information 13: Time domain location information of the at least one SRS.
该时域位置信息可以表示绝对的时域位置,比如,表示至少一个SRS中的每个SRS的资源位于哪个或哪些无线帧,或子帧,或时隙,或正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号等。该时域位置信息还可以表示相对的时域位置,比如无线帧偏移量,或子帧偏移量,或时隙偏移量,或正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号偏移量等。终端设备可以根据相对的时域位置确定绝对时域位置。The time domain location information may represent an absolute time domain location, for example, indicating which radio frame or cells, or subframes, or orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (or orthogonal frequency division multiplexing) the resources of each SRS in the at least one SRS are located. Frequency division multiplexing, OFDM) symbols, and the like. The time domain location information may also represent relative time domain locations, such as radio frame offset, or subframe offset, or slot offset, or orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM). Symbol offset, etc. The terminal device can determine the absolute time domain location based on the relative time domain location.
信息14:所述至少一个SRS的标识信息;Information 14: identification information of the at least one SRS;
接入网设备可以为终端设备在一个频域资源上配置多个SRS,即配置多套SRS资源,不同的SRS可能具有不同的发送方式,不同的SRS也可能具有不同的功能。此时,为了区分不同的SRS,第一配置信息中携带至少一个SRS的标识信息。不同的SRS具有不同的标识信息。该标识信息可以是显式的标识信息,比如,标识信息可以是标识(Identity)或索引(Index)。或者,该标识信息可以是隐式的标识信息,比如,一个SRS的标识信息根据该SRS在第一配置信息中的至少一个SRS中的位置来确定,第一个SRS的标识信息为0,第二个SRS的标识信息为1等。本发明不作限制。SRS的标识信息还可以是SRS占用的资源标识,比如资源ID。SRS的标识信息还可以是SRS占用的资源所在的资源组的标识。SRS的标识信息还可以是SRS占用的时域资源的标识,或频域资源标识,或码域资源标识,或空域资源标识等。当所述至少一个SRS替换为至少一组SRS时,SRS的标识信息可以是SRS组的标识信息。不再赘述。The access network device may configure multiple SRSs on one frequency domain resource for the terminal device, that is, configure multiple sets of SRS resources, different SRSs may have different transmission modes, and different SRSs may have different functions. At this time, in order to distinguish different SRSs, the first configuration information carries identification information of at least one SRS. Different SRSs have different identification information. The identification information may be explicit identification information, for example, the identification information may be an identity or an index. Alternatively, the identifier information may be implicit identifier information. For example, the identifier information of one SRS is determined according to the location of the SRS in the at least one SRS in the first configuration information, and the identifier information of the first SRS is 0. The identification information of the two SRSs is 1 or the like. The invention is not limited. The identifier information of the SRS may also be a resource identifier occupied by the SRS, such as a resource ID. The identifier information of the SRS may also be the identifier of the resource group where the resource occupied by the SRS is located. The identifier information of the SRS may also be an identifier of a time domain resource occupied by the SRS, or a frequency domain resource identifier, or a code domain resource identifier, or an airspace resource identifier. When the at least one SRS is replaced with at least one group of SRSs, the identification information of the SRS may be identification information of the SRS group. No longer.
可选的,当接入网设备为终端设备在一个频域资源上只配置一个SRS时,该第一配置信息中可以不携带SRS的标识信息。终端设备和接入网设备可以按照预先定义的标识表示所述SRS。Optionally, when the access network device configures only one SRS for the terminal device in a frequency domain resource, the first configuration information may not carry the identifier information of the SRS. The terminal device and the access network device may represent the SRS according to a predefined identifier.
信息15:所述频域资源的标识信息。Information 15: Identification information of the frequency domain resource.
接入网设备可以为终端设备配置多个频域资源。比如,在CA,LAA,DC,LTE与NRDC等场景下,接入网设备为终端设备配置5个频域资源。此时,为了区分不同的频域资源,第一配置信息中携带频域资源的标识信息。不同的频域资源可以具有不同的标识信息。该标识信息可以是显式的标识信息,比如,当频域资源是服务小区时,标识信息可以是小区标识(Cell Identity)或小区索引(Cell Index),当频域资源是BWP时,标识信息可以BWP标识,或BWP索引。或者,该标识信息可以是隐式的标识信息,比如,一个频域资源的标识信 息根据该频域资源在第一配置信息中包括的多个频域资源中的位置来确定,第一个频域资源的标识信息为0,第二个频域资源的标识信息为1等。再比如,一个频域资源的标识信息根据该频域资源在第一配置信息中包括的多个频域资源中的频率从低到高(或从高到低)的顺序来确定。本发明不作限制。The access network device can configure multiple frequency domain resources for the terminal device. For example, in a scenario such as CA, LAA, DC, LTE, and NRDC, the access network device configures five frequency domain resources for the terminal device. At this time, in order to distinguish different frequency domain resources, the first configuration information carries the identification information of the frequency domain resource. Different frequency domain resources may have different identification information. The identifier information may be explicit identifier information. For example, when the frequency domain resource is a serving cell, the identifier information may be a cell identity (Cell Identity) or a cell index (Cell Index). When the frequency domain resource is a BWP, the identifier information is used. Can be BWP logo, or BWP index. Alternatively, the identifier information may be an implicit identifier information. For example, the identifier information of a frequency domain resource is determined according to a location of the frequency domain resource in multiple frequency domain resources included in the first configuration information, and the first frequency is determined. The identifier information of the domain resource is 0, and the identifier information of the second frequency domain resource is 1. For another example, the identification information of a frequency domain resource is determined according to an order in which the frequency of the frequency domain resource in the plurality of frequency domain resources included in the first configuration information is from low to high (or high to low). The invention is not limited.
可选的,当接入网设备为终端设备只配置一个频域资源时,该第一配置信息中可以不携带频域资源的标识信息。Optionally, when the access network device configures only one frequency domain resource for the terminal device, the first configuration information may not carry the identifier information of the frequency domain resource.
需要说明的是,上述信息11至信息15中的一部分可以在协议中固定或预配置,另一部分在第一配置信息中携带。比如,信息11在协议中固定为周期性的发送方式,或者信息11被预配置为周期性的发送方式,则第一配置信息中可以不携带信息11。其它信息与此类似,不再赘述。It should be noted that some of the above information 11 to 15 may be fixed or pre-configured in the protocol, and another part is carried in the first configuration information. For example, if the information 11 is fixed to the periodic transmission mode in the protocol, or the information 11 is pre-configured to be a periodic transmission mode, the information 11 may not be carried in the first configuration information. Other information is similar to this and will not be described again.
一种实现方式中,终端设备通过无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)层消息,媒体接入控制(Media Access Control,MAC)层消息,或者物理层消息可以接收第一配置信息或接收第一配置信息中包括的信息11~信息15中的一个或多个。其中,RRC层消息可以是系统广播消息,或者RRC层消息可以是专用RRC消息。本发明不作限制。In an implementation manner, the terminal device may receive the first configuration information or receive the first information by using a Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer message, a Media Access Control (MAC) layer message, or a physical layer message. One or more of the information 11 to the information 15 included in the configuration information. The RRC layer message may be a system broadcast message, or the RRC layer message may be a dedicated RRC message. The invention is not limited.
一种实现方式中,第一配置信息中的信息11~信息15可以在同一消息中,也可以在不同消息中。比如,信息11~信息13在RRC重配置消息1中,信息14~信息15在RRC重配置消息2中。本发明不作限制。In an implementation manner, the information 11 to the information 15 in the first configuration information may be in the same message or in different messages. For example, information 11 to 13 are in RRC reconfiguration message 1, and information 14 to 15 are in RRC reconfiguration message 2. The invention is not limited.
一种实现方式中,接入网设备中的收发器302可用于发送所述第一配置信息,或者接入网设备中的处理器301控制收发器302发送所述第一配置信息。In an implementation manner, the transceiver 302 in the access network device may be configured to send the first configuration information, or the processor 301 in the access network device controls the transceiver 302 to send the first configuration information.
一种实现方式中,终端设备中的收发器204可用于接收所述第一配置信息,或者终端设备中的处理器201控制收发器204接收所述第一配置信息。In one implementation, the transceiver 204 in the terminal device can be configured to receive the first configuration information, or the processor 201 in the terminal device controls the transceiver 204 to receive the first configuration information.
步骤S102,接入网设备向终端设备发送第二配置信息;相应的,终端设备从接入网设备接收第二配置信息。Step S102: The access network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second configuration information from the access network device.
第二配置信息可用于指示如下信息中的任一项:The second configuration information can be used to indicate any of the following information:
信息21:接入网设备向终端设备分别发送物理信道和SRS的功率控制命令(Transmission Power Control,TPC);相应的,终端设备分别接收接入网设备发送的物理信道的功率控制命令和SRS的功率控制命令。Information 21: The access network device separately transmits a physical channel and a power control command (TPC) of the SRS to the terminal device; correspondingly, the terminal device separately receives the power control command and the SRS of the physical channel sent by the access network device Power control commands.
在本发明各实施例中,物理信道包括PUSCH和/或PUCCH。比如,接入网设备向终端设备分别发送PUSCH(或PUCCH)的功率控制命令和SRS的功率控制命令,终端设备根据接收到的PUSCH(或PUCCH)的功率控制命令,调整PUSCH(或PUCCH)的发射功率;根据接收到的SRS的功率控制命令,调整SRS的发射功率。或者,接入网设备向终端设备分别发送PUSCH的功率控制命令,PUCCH的功率控制命令,和SRS的功率控制命令。接入网设备通过一个或者多个下行控制信息向终端设备PUSCH的功率控制命令,PUCCH的功率控制命令,和SRS的功率控制命令。In various embodiments of the invention, the physical channel comprises a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH. For example, the access network device separately sends a power control command of the PUSCH (or PUCCH) and a power control command of the SRS to the terminal device, and the terminal device adjusts the PUSCH (or PUCCH) according to the power control command of the received PUSCH (or PUCCH). Transmit power; adjust the transmit power of the SRS according to the power control command of the received SRS. Alternatively, the access network device separately sends a power control command of the PUSCH, a power control command of the PUCCH, and a power control command of the SRS to the terminal device. The power control command of the access network device to the terminal device PUSCH through one or more downlink control information, the power control command of the PUCCH, and the power control command of the SRS.
当接入网设备为终端设备配置了多个频域资源时,信息21表示在所有所述多个频域资源上,接入网设备向所述终端设备分别发送物理信道和SRS的功率控制命令。When the access network device configures multiple frequency domain resources for the terminal device, the information 21 indicates that the access network device sends the physical channel and the SRS power control command to the terminal device respectively on all the multiple frequency domain resources. .
采用信息21的好处是,当接入网设备为终端设备配置了多个频域资源时,能有效节省第二配置信息的信令开销。The advantage of using the information 21 is that when the access network device configures multiple frequency domain resources for the terminal device, the signaling overhead of the second configuration information can be effectively saved.
信息22:接入网设备向终端设备分别发送频域资源上的物理信道和频域资源上的SRS的功率控制命令;相应的,终端设备分别接收接入网设备发送的频域资源上的物理信道的功率 控制命令和SRS的功率控制命令。与信息21相比,信息22只应用于特定频域资源。比如,接入网设备为终端设备配置了3个频域资源(表示为频域资源1,频域资源2和频域资源3),通过信息22可以只应用于频域资源1和频域资源3。与信息21相比,信息22更灵活,但是信令开销比较大。Information 22: The access network device separately sends the SRS power control command on the physical channel and the frequency domain resource on the frequency domain resource to the terminal device; correspondingly, the terminal device separately receives the physical on the frequency domain resource sent by the access network device Power control commands for the channel and power control commands for the SRS. Compared to the information 21, the information 22 is only applied to specific frequency domain resources. For example, the access network device configures three frequency domain resources (represented as frequency domain resource 1, frequency domain resource 2, and frequency domain resource 3) for the terminal device, and the information 22 can be applied only to the frequency domain resource 1 and the frequency domain resource. 3. Compared with the information 21, the information 22 is more flexible, but the signaling overhead is relatively large.
可选的,当接入网设备为终端设备配置了一个频域资源,信息21和信息22相同。Optionally, when the access network device configures a frequency domain resource for the terminal device, the information 21 and the information 22 are the same.
信息23:终端设备用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同。信息23还可以是,终端设备用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率,其中,用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率与用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同。比如,用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率为20dBm,用于PUSCH和或PUCCH上的第二最大发射功率是23dBm等。采用信息23的好处是,当接入网设备为终端设备配置了多个频域资源时,能有效节省第二配置信息的信令开销,且为接入网设备的调度提供了灵活度。Information 23: The second maximum transmit power used by the terminal device to transmit the SRS is different from the second maximum transmit power used on the physical channel. The information 23 may also be a second maximum transmit power used by the terminal device to transmit the SRS and a second maximum transmit power for transmitting on the physical channel, wherein the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS is used for the physical channel The second maximum transmit power is different. For example, the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS is 20 dBm, and the second maximum transmit power for the PUSCH and or PUCCH is 23 dBm. The advantage of using the information 23 is that when the access network device configures multiple frequency domain resources for the terminal device, the signaling overhead of the second configuration information can be effectively saved, and the flexibility of the scheduling of the access network device is provided.
信息24:终端设备用于在频域资源上发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在频域资源上的物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同。信息24还可以是,终端设备用于在频域资源上发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在频域资源上的物理信道上的第二最大发射功率,其中,用于在频域资源上发送SRS的第二最大发射功率与用于在频域资源上的物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同。与信息23相比,信息24只应用于特定频域资源。比如,接入网设备为终端设备配置了3个频域资源(表示为频域资源1,频域资源2和频域资源3),通过信息24可以只应用于频域资源1和频域资源3。与信息23相比,信息24更灵活,但是信令开销比较大。Information 24: The second maximum transmit power used by the terminal device to transmit the SRS on the frequency domain resource and the second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource are different. The information 24 may also be a second maximum transmit power used by the terminal device to transmit the SRS on the frequency domain resource and a second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource, wherein the resource is used in the frequency domain. The second maximum transmit power of the upper transmit SRS is different than the second maximum transmit power for the physical channel on the frequency domain resource. Compared to the information 23, the information 24 is only applied to specific frequency domain resources. For example, the access network device configures three frequency domain resources (represented as frequency domain resource 1, frequency domain resource 2, and frequency domain resource 3) for the terminal device, and the information 24 can be applied only to the frequency domain resource 1 and the frequency domain resource. 3. Compared with the information 23, the information 24 is more flexible, but the signaling overhead is relatively large.
一种实现方式中,终端设备通过无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)层消息,媒体接入控制(Media Access Control,MAC)层消息,或者物理层消息可以携带第二配置信息。其中,RRC层消息可以是系统广播消息,或者RRC层消息可以是专用RRC消息。本发明不作限制。In an implementation manner, the terminal device may carry the second configuration information by using a radio resource control (RRC) layer message, a media access control (MAC) layer message, or a physical layer message. The RRC layer message may be a system broadcast message, or the RRC layer message may be a dedicated RRC message. The invention is not limited.
一种实现方式中,第一配置信息和第二配置信息可以在同一条消息中,也可以在不同消息中,本发明不作限制。In an implementation manner, the first configuration information and the second configuration information may be in the same message or in different messages, and the invention is not limited.
一种实现方式中,接入网设备中的收发器302可用于发送所述第二配置信息,或者接入网设备中的处理器301控制收发器302发送所述第二配置信息。In an implementation manner, the transceiver 302 in the access network device may be configured to send the second configuration information, or the processor 301 in the access network device controls the transceiver 302 to send the second configuration information.
一种实现方式中,终端设备中的收发器204可用于接收所述第二配置信息,或者终端设备中的处理器201控制收发器204接收所述第二配置信息。In one implementation, the transceiver 204 in the terminal device can be configured to receive the second configuration information, or the processor 201 in the terminal device controls the transceiver 204 to receive the second configuration information.
一种实现方式中,第二配置信息可以在协议中固定。此时,步骤S102可以替换为终端设备获得第二配置信息。即接入网设备不需要向终端设备发送第二配置信息,终端设备也不需要从接入网接收第二配置信息。In one implementation, the second configuration information may be fixed in the protocol. At this time, step S102 can be replaced with the terminal device obtaining the second configuration information. That is, the access network device does not need to send the second configuration information to the terminal device, and the terminal device does not need to receive the second configuration information from the access network.
一种实现方式中,终端设备中的处理器201可用于获得所述第二配置信息。In an implementation manner, the processor 201 in the terminal device is configured to obtain the second configuration information.
步骤S102可选。Step S102 is optional.
步骤S103,终端设备确定频域资源的第一时间段上的第一SRS。Step S103: The terminal device determines the first SRS on the first time period of the frequency domain resource.
可选的,在终端设备确定第一SRS之前,PH上报被触发。其中,触发PH上报的条件包括如下条件中的任意一个:Optionally, the PH report is triggered before the terminal device determines the first SRS. The condition for triggering the PH report includes any one of the following conditions:
条件1,禁止PH上报定时器(prohibitPHR-Timer)超时,且至少有一个激活的频域资源的路径损耗值大于特定值,如dl-Pathloss Change dB Condition 1, the PH reporting timer (prohibitPHR-Timer) is disabled, and the path loss value of at least one active frequency domain resource is greater than a specific value, such as dl-Pathloss Change dB.
条件2,周期性PH上报定时器(periodicPHR-Timer)超时 Condition 2, periodic PH reporting timer (periodicPHR-Timer) times out
条件3,RRC对PHR功能的配置或者重配置 Condition 3, RRC configuration or reconfiguration of the PHR function
条件4,配置的上行频域资源被激活,其中上行频域资源可以是SCell Condition 4, the configured uplink frequency domain resource is activated, where the uplink frequency domain resource may be SCell
条件5,添加频域资源,其中频域资源可以是PSCell Condition 5, adding a frequency domain resource, wherein the frequency domain resource may be PSCell
条件6,对于任何一个频域资源,在prohibitPHR-Timer超时的条件下,自从上一次发送PHR,功率回退改变的值超过了特定值,如dl-PathlossChange dB Condition 6, for any frequency domain resource, the value of the power backoff change exceeds a certain value, such as dl-PathlossChange dB, since the last PHR was sent under the condition that the prohibitPHR-Timer expired.
条件7,SRS和物理信道功率控制方式发生改变。比如,由对SRS和物理信道统一功率控制变成分别对SRS和物理信道进行功率控制,或者由分别对SRS和物理信道进行功率控制变成对SRS和物理信道统一功率控制。 Condition 7, the SRS and physical channel power control modes change. For example, unified power control for SRS and physical channels becomes power control for SRS and physical channels, respectively, or power control for SRS and physical channels respectively becomes unified power control for SRS and physical channels.
条件8,SRS的资源被配置或重新配置。比如,之前终端设备没有被配置SRS资源,通过第一配置信息配置了SRS资源,或者之前终端设备被配置的SRS资源发生改变。 Condition 8, the resources of the SRS are configured or reconfigured. For example, the previous terminal device is not configured with the SRS resource, and the SRS resource is configured through the first configuration information, or the SRS resource of the previous terminal device is changed.
当PH被触发后,如果终端设备在第一时间段上有用于传输上行数据的物理资源,则终端设备可以确定频域资源的第一时间段上的第一SRS。After the PH is triggered, if the terminal device has a physical resource for transmitting uplink data in the first time period, the terminal device may determine the first SRS on the first time period of the frequency domain resource.
在描述终端设备确定频域资源的第一时间段上的第一SRS之前,先对第一时间段进行描述。通常,第一时间段的长度可以表示发送一个传输块(TransportBlock,TB)或MAC协议数据单元(Protocol DataUnit,PDU)的最短时间。第一时间段的长度可以是N毫秒,或者,第一时间段的长度可以等于N个子帧(Subframe)的长度,或者等于N个时隙(Slot)的长度,或者等于N个迷你时隙(Mini-Slot)的长度,或者等于N个OFDM符号的长度,或者等于传输时间间隔(Transmission Time Interval,TTI)的长度等。N为正整数。在不同的通信系统中,第一时间段的长度可以不同。在同一通信系统中,也有可能存在多种不同的第一时间段的长度。比如,在UMTS系统中,第一时间段的长度可以是10ms,或2ms,在LTE系统中,第一时间段的长度可以是1ms,或0.5ms。在本发明不作限制。Before describing the first SRS on the first time period in which the terminal device determines the frequency domain resource, the first time period is described first. Generally, the length of the first time period may represent the shortest time to transmit one transport block (TransportBlock, TB) or a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU). The length of the first time period may be N milliseconds, or the length of the first time period may be equal to the length of N subframes, or equal to the length of N time slots (Slots), or equal to N mini time slots ( The length of the Mini-Slot is equal to the length of the N OFDM symbols, or equal to the length of the Transmission Time Interval (TTI). N is a positive integer. In different communication systems, the length of the first time period can be different. In the same communication system, it is also possible to have a plurality of different lengths of the first time period. For example, in the UMTS system, the length of the first time period may be 10 ms, or 2 ms. In the LTE system, the length of the first time period may be 1 ms, or 0.5 ms. The invention is not limited.
以第一时间段的长度等于时隙的长度为例,第一时间段表示一个特定的时隙。图5给出了一个在时隙i,时隙i+x,时隙i+y和时隙i+z上发送SRS的示意图。以LTE系统为例,在使用普通循环前缀(Normal Cyclic Prefix)时,一个时隙包括14个OFDM符号,图中一个小方框代表一个OFDM符号,时隙的第一个OFDM符号至时隙的最后一个OFDM符号分别编号为OFDM0~OFDM13。假设第一配置信息中包括5个SRS,对应的SRS的标识信息分别为0~4,5个SRS分别表示为SRS0~SRS4)。在时隙i上,终端设备根据第一配置信息确定需要发送SRS0~SRS2。在时隙i+x上,终端设备根据第一配置信息确定需要发送SRS3~SRS4。在时隙i+y上,终端设备根据第一配置信息确定不发送SRS。在时隙i+z上,终端设备根据第一配置信息确定需要发送SRS0~SRS4。其中,SRS1和SRS2在同一个OFDM符号上发送,此时,SRS1和SRS2在频域上的资源可以不同,或者在码域上的资源可以不同。Taking the length of the first time period equal to the length of the time slot as an example, the first time period represents a specific time slot. Figure 5 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting SRS on time slot i, time slot i+x, time slot i+y and time slot i+z. Taking the LTE system as an example, when a normal Cyclic Prefix is used, one slot includes 14 OFDM symbols, and one small box in the figure represents one OFDM symbol, and the first OFDM symbol of the slot to the slot The last OFDM symbols are numbered OFDM0 to OFDM13, respectively. It is assumed that the first configuration information includes five SRSs, and the corresponding SRS identification information is 0 to 4, and the five SRSs are respectively represented as SRS0 to SRS4). On the time slot i, the terminal device determines that it is necessary to transmit SRS0 to SRS2 according to the first configuration information. On the time slot i+x, the terminal device determines that it is necessary to transmit SRS3 to SRS4 according to the first configuration information. On the time slot i+y, the terminal device determines not to transmit the SRS according to the first configuration information. On the time slot i+z, the terminal device determines that it is necessary to transmit SRS0 to SRS4 according to the first configuration information. The SRS1 and the SRS2 are transmitted on the same OFDM symbol. In this case, the resources of the SRS1 and the SRS2 in the frequency domain may be different, or the resources in the code domain may be different.
第一SRS包括步骤S101中的至少一个SRS中的一个或多个。具体的,终端设备可以采用如下实现方式中的一种或多种组合确定第一SRS。The first SRS includes one or more of at least one SRS in step S101. Specifically, the terminal device may determine the first SRS by using one or more combinations of the following implementation manners.
方式1,终端设备根据第一配置信息中包括的信息11,用于指示所述至少一个SRS的发送方式的指示信息,确定第一SRS。比如,终端设备获得预配置的规则,该规则可以是非周期性的发送方式的优先级最高,半静态的发送方式的优先级次之,周期性的发送方式的优先级最低。当终端设备在第一时间段上的多个SRS的发送方式不同时,终端设备可以采用优先级从高到低(或从低到高)的方式,确定第一SRS。In a first mode, the terminal device determines, according to the information 11 included in the first configuration information, indication information indicating a manner of sending the at least one SRS, and determines the first SRS. For example, the terminal device obtains a pre-configured rule, and the rule may be that the aperiodic transmission mode has the highest priority, the semi-static transmission mode has the lower priority, and the periodic transmission mode has the lowest priority. When the sending manners of the multiple SRSs of the terminal device in the first time period are different, the terminal device may determine the first SRS by using a priority from high to low (or low to high).
方式1的一种实现方式可以为,终端设备从第一时间段上实际要发送的一个或多个SRS中,确定第一SRS。仍以图5为例,假设SRS0的发送方式为非周期性的发送方式,SRS1发送 方式为半静态的发送方式,SRS2的发送方式为周期性的发送方式,SRS3的发送方式为半静态的发送方式,SRS4的发送方式为周期性的发送方式。在时隙i上,由于非周期性的发送方式的优先级高于半静态的发送方式和周期性的发送方式的优先级,终端设备确定时隙i上的第一SRS为SRS0。在时隙i+x上,由于半静态的发送方式的优先级高于周期性的发送方式的优先级,终端设备确定时隙i+x上的第一SRS为SRS3。One implementation manner of the mode 1 may be that the terminal device determines the first SRS from one or more SRSs actually to be sent on the first time period. As shown in FIG. 5, it is assumed that the SRS0 transmission mode is an aperiodic transmission mode, the SRS1 transmission mode is a semi-static transmission mode, the SRS2 transmission mode is a periodic transmission mode, and the SRS3 transmission mode is a semi-static transmission mode. In the mode, the SRS4 transmission mode is a periodic transmission mode. On the time slot i, the terminal device determines that the first SRS on the time slot i is SRS0 because the priority of the aperiodic transmission mode is higher than the priority of the semi-static transmission mode and the periodic transmission mode. On the time slot i+x, since the priority of the semi-static transmission mode is higher than the priority of the periodic transmission mode, the terminal device determines that the first SRS on the time slot i+x is SRS3.
方式1的另外一种具体实现方式可以是,终端设备根据所有所述至少一个SRS的发送方式,确定第一时间段上的第一SRS。此时,终端设备确定的第一SRS中,包括不在第一时间段上发送的SRS。比如,仍以图5为例,假设SRS0的发送方式为非周期性的发送方式,SRS1的发送方式为半静态的发送方式,SRS2的发送方式为周期性的发送方式,SRS3的发送方式为半静态的发送方式,SRS4的发送方式为周期性的发送方式。在时隙i+x上,虽然终端设备只会发送SRS3和SRS4,但是,根据上述预配置的规则,终端设备仍然确定时隙i+x上的第一SRS为SRS0。Another specific implementation manner of the mode 1 may be that the terminal device determines the first SRS in the first time period according to the sending manner of all the at least one SRS. At this time, the first SRS determined by the terminal device includes the SRS that is not sent on the first time period. For example, the SRS0 transmission mode is a semi-static transmission mode, the SRS2 transmission mode is a periodic transmission mode, and the SRS3 transmission mode is a half. In the static transmission mode, the SRS4 transmission mode is a periodic transmission mode. On the slot i+x, although the terminal device only transmits SRS3 and SRS4, according to the above pre-configured rules, the terminal device still determines that the first SRS on the slot i+x is SRS0.
可以理解的,上述预配置的规则中各种发送方式的优先级顺序还可以是周期性的发送方式的优先级>半静态的发送方式的优先级>周期性的发送方式的优先级,其中符号“>”表示高于。本发明各实施例对上述预配置的规则中各种发送方式的优先级顺序不作具体限定。It can be understood that the priority order of the various sending modes in the foregoing pre-configured rules may also be the priority of the periodic sending mode > the priority of the semi-static sending mode > the priority of the periodic sending mode, where the symbol “>” means higher than. The priority order of the various sending modes in the pre-configured rules is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present invention.
方式2,终端设备根据第一配置信息中包括的信息12用于指示所述至少一个SRS的功能的指示信息,确定第一SRS。比如,终端设备获得预配置的规则,该规则可以是用于基于码本(CodeBook)的传输的优先级>用于基于非码本的传输的优先级>用于SRS切换的优先级>用于波束管理的优先级,其中符号“>”表示高于。当终端设备在第一时间段上的多个SRS的功能不同时,终端设备可以采用优先级从高到低(或从低到高)的方式,确定第一SRS。SRS的功能又可以属于用于上行测量的功能或用于下行测量的功能,比如,用于基于码本(CodeBook)的传输和用于基于非码本的传输属于用于下行测量的功能,用于SRS切换属于上行测量功能等。此时,终端设备可以根据预配置的规则,比如用于上行测量的功能的优先级>(或小于)用于下行测量的功能的优先级来,确定第一SRS。Mode 2: The terminal device determines, according to the information 12 included in the first configuration information, indication information indicating a function of the at least one SRS, to determine the first SRS. For example, the terminal device obtains a pre-configured rule, which may be a priority for codebook based transmission > priority for non-codebook based transmission > priority for SRS handover > for The priority of beam management, where the symbol ">" indicates higher. When the functions of the plurality of SRSs of the terminal device in the first time period are different, the terminal device may determine the first SRS by using a priority from high to low (or low to high). The function of the SRS may in turn be a function for uplink measurement or a function for downlink measurement, for example, for codebook-based transmission and for non-codebook-based transmission, which are functions for downlink measurement, The SRS switching is an uplink measurement function or the like. At this time, the terminal device may determine the first SRS according to a pre-configured rule, such as a priority of a function for uplink measurement > (or less than) a priority of a function for downlink measurement.
方式2的一种实现方式可以为,终端设备从第一时间段上实际要发送的一个或多个SRS中,确定第一SRS。仍以图5为例,假设SRS0的功能为用于基于码本(CodeBook)的传输,SRS1的功能为用于基于非码本的传输,SRS2的功能为用于SRS切换,SRS3的功能为用于SRS切换,SRS4的功能为用于波束管理。在时隙i上,由于用于基于码本(CodeBook)的传输的优先级高于用于基于非码本的传输和用于SRS切换的优先级,终端设备确定时隙i上的第一SRS为SRS0。在时隙i+x上,由于用于SRS切换的优先级高于用于波束管理的优先级,终端设备确定时隙i+x上的第一SRS为SRS3。One implementation manner of the mode 2 may be that the terminal device determines the first SRS from one or more SRSs actually to be sent on the first time period. Still taking FIG. 5 as an example, it is assumed that the function of SRS0 is used for codebook-based transmission, and the function of SRS1 is for non-codebook-based transmission, and the function of SRS2 is for SRS handover, and the function of SRS3 is used. For SRS handover, the function of SRS4 is for beam management. On slot i, since the priority for codebook based transmission is higher than for non-codebook based transmission and for SRS handover, the terminal device determines the first SRS on slot i For SRS0. On slot i+x, since the priority for SRS handover is higher than the priority for beam management, the terminal device determines that the first SRS on slot i+x is SRS3.
方式2的另外一种具体实现方式可以是,终端设备根据所有所述至少一个SRS的功能,确定第一时间段上的第一SRS。此时,终端设备确定的第一SRS中,包括不在第一时间段上发送的SRS。比如,仍以图5为例,假设SRS0的功能为用于基于码本(CodeBook)的传输,SRS1的功能为用于基于非码本的传输,SRS2的功能为用于SRS切换,SRS3的功能为用于SRS切换,SRS4的功能为用于波束管理。在时隙i+x上,虽然终端设备只会发送SRS3和SRS4,但是,根据上述预配置的规则,终端设备仍然确定时隙i+x上的第一SRS为SRS0。Another specific implementation manner of the mode 2 may be that the terminal device determines the first SRS in the first time period according to the function of all the at least one SRS. At this time, the first SRS determined by the terminal device includes the SRS that is not sent on the first time period. For example, still taking FIG. 5 as an example, it is assumed that the function of SRS0 is used for codebook-based transmission, and the function of SRS1 is for non-codebook-based transmission, and the function of SRS2 is for SRS handover, SRS3 function. For SRS handover, the function of SRS4 is for beam management. On the slot i+x, although the terminal device only transmits SRS3 and SRS4, according to the above pre-configured rules, the terminal device still determines that the first SRS on the slot i+x is SRS0.
可以理解的,上述预配置的规则中各种发送方式的优先级顺序还可以用于基于非码本的传输的优先级>用于基于码本(CodeBook)的传输的优先级>用于SRS切换的优先级>用于波束管理的优先级,其中符号“>”表示高于。本发明各实施例对上述预配置的规则中各种功能的 优先级顺序不作具体限定。It can be understood that the priority order of various transmission modes in the above pre-configured rules can also be used for priority based on non-codebook transmission > priority for codebook based transmission > for SRS handover Priority > Priority for beam management, where the symbol ">" indicates higher. The embodiments of the present invention do not specifically limit the priority order of the various functions in the pre-configured rules.
方式3,终端设备根据第一配置信息中包括的至少一个SRS的时域位置信息,确定第一SRS。比如,终端设备获得预配置的规则,该规则可以是至少一个SRS在第一时间段中的时域位置越早,优先级越高,时域位置越晚,优先级越低。当终端设备在第一时间段上的多个SRS的时域位置不同时,终端设备可以采用优先级从高到低(或从低到高)的方式,确定第一SRS。所述时域位置早则表示所述时域位置对应的OFDM符号在第一时间段内的编号越小,反之,时域位置晚则表示所述时域位置对应的OFDM符号第一时间段内的编号越大。Manner 3: The terminal device determines the first SRS according to the time domain location information of the at least one SRS included in the first configuration information. For example, the terminal device obtains a pre-configured rule, and the rule may be that the earlier the time domain location of the at least one SRS in the first time period, the higher the priority, the later the time domain location, and the lower the priority. When the time domain location of the multiple SRSs of the terminal device in the first time period is different, the terminal device may determine the first SRS by using a priority from high to low (or low to high). The time domain location indicates that the OFDM symbol corresponding to the time domain location has a smaller number in the first time period, and vice versa, the time domain location is later, the OFDM symbol corresponding to the time domain location is within the first time period. The number is larger.
方式3的一种实现方式可以为,终端设备从第一时间段上实际要发送的一个或多个SRS中,确定第一SRS。仍以图5为例,SRS0的时域位置是符号8,SRS1的时域位置是符号11,SRS2的时域位置是符号11,SRS3的时域位置是符号10,SRS4的时域位置是符号13。在时隙i上,由于SRS0的时域位置早于SRS1和SRS2的时域位置,因此,SRS0的优先级高于SRS1和SRS2的优先级,终端设备确定时隙i上的第一SRS为SRS0。在时隙i+x上,由于SRS3的时域位置早于SRS4的时域位置,终端设备确定时隙i+x上的第一SRS为SRS3。An implementation manner of the mode 3 may be that the terminal device determines the first SRS from one or more SRSs that are actually to be sent on the first time period. Still taking FIG. 5 as an example, the time domain position of SRS0 is symbol 8, the time domain position of SRS1 is symbol 11, the time domain position of SRS2 is symbol 11, the time domain position of SRS3 is symbol 10, and the time domain position of SRS4 is symbol 13. In slot i, since the time domain position of SRS0 is earlier than the time domain positions of SRS1 and SRS2, the priority of SRS0 is higher than the priorities of SRS1 and SRS2, and the terminal device determines that the first SRS on slot i is SRS0. . On the slot i+x, since the time domain position of the SRS3 is earlier than the time domain position of the SRS4, the terminal device determines that the first SRS on the slot i+x is SRS3.
方式3的另外一种具体实现方式可以是,终端设备根据所有所述至少一个SRS的时域位置信息,确定第一时间段上的第一SRS。此时,终端设备确定的第一SRS中,包括不在第一时间段上发送的SRS。比如,仍以图5为例,SRS0的时域位置是符号8,SRS1的时域位置是符号11,SRS2的时域位置是符号11,SRS3的时域位置是符号10,SRS4的时域位置是符号13。在时隙i+x上,虽然终端设备只会发送SRS3和SRS4,但是,根据上述预配置的规则,终端设备仍然确定时隙i+x上的第一SRS为SRS0。Another specific implementation manner of the mode 3 may be that the terminal device determines the first SRS in the first time period according to the time domain location information of all the at least one SRS. At this time, the first SRS determined by the terminal device includes the SRS that is not sent on the first time period. For example, still taking FIG. 5 as an example, the time domain position of SRS0 is symbol 8, the time domain position of SRS1 is symbol 11, the time domain position of SRS2 is symbol 11, the time domain position of SRS3 is symbol 10, and the time domain position of SRS4. Is the symbol 13. On the slot i+x, although the terminal device only transmits SRS3 and SRS4, according to the above pre-configured rules, the terminal device still determines that the first SRS on the slot i+x is SRS0.
可以理解的,上述预配置的规则还可以是至少一个SRS在第一时间段中的时域位置越早,优先级越低,时域位置越晚,优先级越高。本发明各实施例不作具体限定。It can be understood that the foregoing pre-configured rule may also be that the earlier the time domain location of the at least one SRS in the first time period, the lower the priority, the later the time domain location, and the higher the priority. The embodiments of the present invention are not specifically limited.
方式4,终端设备根据第一配置信息中包括的至少一个SRS的标识信息,确定第一SRS。比如,终端设备获得预配置的规则,该规则可以是至少一个SRS的标识信息越小,优先级越高,标识信息越大,优先级越低。终端设备可以采用优先级从高到低(或从低到高)的方式,从确定第一时间段上的多个SRS中第一SRS。Mode 4: The terminal device determines the first SRS according to the identifier information of the at least one SRS included in the first configuration information. For example, the terminal device obtains a pre-configured rule, and the rule may be that the identifier information of the at least one SRS is smaller, the higher the priority, the larger the identifier information, and the lower the priority. The terminal device may determine the first SRS of the plurality of SRSs on the first time period by using a priority from high to low (or low to high).
方式4的一种实现方式可以为,终端设备从第一时间段上实际要发送的一个或多个SRS中,确定第一SRS。仍以图5为例,假设SRS0的标识信息为0(比如标识或索引等于0),SRS1的标识信息为1,SRS2的标识信息为2,SRS3的标识信息为3,SRS4的标识信息为4。在时隙i上,由于SRS0的标识信息小于SRS1和SRS2的标识信息,因此,SRS0的优先级高于SRS1和SRS2的优先级,终端设备确定时隙i上的第一SRS为SRS0。在时隙i+x上,由于用于SRS3的标识信息小于SRS4的标识信息,终端设备确定时隙i+x上的第一SRS为SRS3。An implementation manner of the method 4 may be that the terminal device determines the first SRS from one or more SRSs that are actually to be sent on the first time period. As shown in FIG. 5, it is assumed that the identification information of SRS0 is 0 (for example, the identifier or index is equal to 0), the identification information of SRS1 is 1, the identification information of SRS2 is 2, the identification information of SRS3 is 3, and the identification information of SRS4 is 4. . On the time slot i, since the identification information of the SRS0 is smaller than the identification information of the SRS1 and the SRS2, the priority of the SRS0 is higher than the priority of the SRS1 and the SRS2, and the terminal device determines that the first SRS on the time slot i is SRS0. On the slot i+x, since the identification information for the SRS3 is smaller than the identification information of the SRS4, the terminal device determines that the first SRS on the slot i+x is SRS3.
方式4的另外一种具体实现方式可以是,终端设备根据所有所述至少一个SRS的标识信息,确定第一时间段上的第一SRS。此时,终端设备确定的第一SRS中,包括不在第一时间段上发送的SRS。比如,仍以图5为例,假设SRS0的标识信息为0(比如标识或索引等于0),SRS1的标识信息为1,SRS2的标识信息为2,SRS3的标识信息为3,SRS4的标识信息为4。在时隙i+x上,虽然终端设备只会发送SRS3和SRS4,但是,根据上述预配置的规则,终端设备仍然确定时隙i+x上的第一SRS为SRS0。Another specific implementation manner of the method 4 may be that the terminal device determines the first SRS in the first time period according to the identifier information of all the at least one SRS. At this time, the first SRS determined by the terminal device includes the SRS that is not sent on the first time period. For example, still take FIG. 5 as an example, and assume that the identification information of SRS0 is 0 (for example, the identifier or index is equal to 0), the identification information of SRS1 is 1, the identification information of SRS2 is 2, the identification information of SRS3 is 3, and the identification information of SRS4 is Is 4. On the slot i+x, although the terminal device only transmits SRS3 and SRS4, according to the above pre-configured rules, the terminal device still determines that the first SRS on the slot i+x is SRS0.
可以理解的,上述预配置的规则还可以是SRS的标识信息越小,优先级越低,标识信息越大,优先级越高。本发明各实施例不作具体限定。It can be understood that the foregoing pre-configured rule may also be that the smaller the identifier information of the SRS is, the lower the priority is, the larger the identifier information is, and the higher the priority is. The embodiments of the present invention are not specifically limited.
当所述至少一个SRS的标识信息优先级相同,或者不规定优先级时,第一SRS可以是所 述优先级相同的或者是没有规定优先级的所有至少一个SRS。When the identification information of the at least one SRS has the same priority or does not specify a priority, the first SRS may be all the at least one SRS having the same priority or having no specified priority.
方式1至4中的各个预配置的规则可以在协议中固定,或者通过接入网设备发送给终端设备。当所述预配置的规则通过接入网设备发送给终端设备时,一种实现方式中,终端设备通过无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)层消息,媒体接入控制(Media Access Control,MAC)层消息,或者物理层消息可以接收预配置的规则。其中,RRC层消息可以是系统广播消息,或者RRC层消息可以是专用RRC消息。本发明不作限制。Each of the pre-configured rules in modes 1 to 4 may be fixed in the protocol or transmitted to the terminal device through the access network device. When the pre-configured rule is sent to the terminal device by using the access network device, in an implementation manner, the terminal device passes the Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer message, and the media access control (MAC) Layer messages, or physical layer messages, can receive pre-configured rules. The RRC layer message may be a system broadcast message, or the RRC layer message may be a dedicated RRC message. The invention is not limited.
方式5,终端设备确定第一SRS包括第一配置信息中的所有所述至少一个SRS。比如,仍以图5为例,在时隙i,时隙i+x,时隙i+y,时隙i+z上,第一SRS都包括SRS0~SRS4。In a mode 5, the terminal device determines that the first SRS includes all the at least one SRS in the first configuration information. For example, still taking FIG. 5 as an example, in the slot i, the slot i+x, the slot i+y, and the slot i+z, the first SRS includes SRS0 to SRS4.
方式6,终端设备确定第一时间段上的第一SRS包括在第一时间段上实际要发送的一个或多个SRS。比如,仍以图5为例,在时隙i,第一SRS包括SRS0~SRS3,在时隙i+x上,第一SRS包括SRS3~SRS4,在时隙i+z上,第一SRS包括SRS0~SRS4。 Mode 6, the terminal device determines that the first SRS on the first time period includes one or more SRSs to be actually sent in the first time period. For example, still taking FIG. 5 as an example, in the slot i, the first SRS includes SRS0 to SRS3, and in the slot i+x, the first SRS includes SRS3 to SRS4, and in the slot i+z, the first SRS includes SRS0 to SRS4.
方式7,终端设备自主确定第一时间段上的第一SRS。In the seventh mode, the terminal device autonomously determines the first SRS on the first time period.
需要说明的是,上述方式1~方式4中的两个或多个可以组合使用。比如,终端设备先根据方式1,从第一配置信息中包括的至少一个SRS中确定出优先级最高的M个SRS,然后再根据方式2,从M个SRS中确定优先级最高的N个SRS,第一SRS包括所述N个SRS。其中,M,N为正整数,且M≥N≥1。再比如,终端设备先根据方式2,从第一配置信息中包括的至少一个SRS中确定出优先级最高的M个SRS,然后再根据方式3,从M个SRS中确定优先级最高的N个SRS,,然后再根据方式4,从N个SRS中确定优先级最高的K个SRS,第一SRS包括所述K个SRS。其中,M,N,K为正整数,且M≥N≥K≥1。本发明不对具体的组合进行限制。本发明不对具体的组合时对方式1~方式4的应用优先级进行限制。当采用方式1~方式4中的两个或多个组合确定第一SRS时,如果按方式1~方式4的应用优先级,第i次应用方式1~方式4中的一个后,确定的SRS的个数大于0,但是,第i+1次应用方式1~方式4中的一个后,确定的SRS个数等于0,则终端设备确定第i次确定的SRS为第一SRS,i为正整数。比如,假设方式1~方式4中优先级依次递减,即方式1的优先级最高,方式4的优先级最低,如果应用方式2后(i=2),确定的SRS的个数为2,但应用方式3(i=3)后,确定的SRS个数为0,则终端设备确定第一SRS为应用方式2后的2个SRS。It should be noted that two or more of the above modes 1 to 4 may be used in combination. For example, the terminal device first determines, according to the mode 1, the M SRSs with the highest priority from the at least one SRS included in the first configuration information, and then determines the N SRSs with the highest priority from the M SRSs according to the mode 2. The first SRS includes the N SRSs. Where M, N are positive integers, and M ≥ N ≥ 1. For example, the terminal device first determines, according to the mode 2, the M SRSs with the highest priority from the at least one SRS included in the first configuration information, and then determines the N with the highest priority from the M SRSs according to the mode 3. SRS, and then according to mode 4, determining K SRSs with the highest priority from the N SRSs, the first SRS including the K SRSs. Where M, N, K are positive integers, and M ≥ N ≥ K ≥ 1. The invention is not limited to specific combinations. The present invention does not limit the application priority of the modes 1 to 4 in the specific combination. When the first SRS is determined by using two or more combinations of the mode 1 to the mode 4, if the application priority of the mode 1 to mode 4 is applied, one of the i-th application modes 1 to 4 is determined, and the determined SRS is determined. The number of the SRS is greater than 0. However, after the first one of the i+1th application mode 1 to mode 4, the determined number of SRSs is equal to 0, the terminal device determines that the SRS determined by the i th is the first SRS, and i is positive. Integer. For example, suppose that the priority of the mode 1 to the mode 4 is successively decremented, that is, the mode 1 has the highest priority, and the mode 4 has the lowest priority. If the mode 2 is applied (i=2), the determined number of SRSs is 2, but After the application mode 3 (i=3), the determined number of SRSs is 0, and the terminal device determines that the first SRS is the two SRSs after the application mode 2.
当所述至少一个SRS替换为至少一组SRS时,所述第一SRS包括第一SRS组。确定方法与确定第一SRS类似,不再赘述。When the at least one SRS is replaced with at least one group of SRSs, the first SRS includes a first SRS group. The determination method is similar to the determination of the first SRS and will not be described again.
一种实现方式中,终端设备中的处理器201可用于确定第一SRS。In one implementation, the processor 201 in the terminal device can be used to determine the first SRS.
步骤S104,终端设备确定频域资源的第一时间段上的功率余量信息。Step S104: The terminal device determines power headroom information on the first time period of the frequency domain resource.
当频域资源被配置成可以发送物理信道(如PUSCH和/或PUCCH),以及发送至少一个SRS时(即,在该频域资源上,终端设备可以在第一时间发送SRS和在物理信道上发送信息),终端设备可以确定以下几种第一时间段上的第一种功率余量于第五种功率余量信息中的一种或多种的组合的信息。When the frequency domain resource is configured to transmit a physical channel (such as PUSCH and/or PUCCH) and transmit at least one SRS (ie, on the frequency domain resource, the terminal device may send the SRS and the physical channel at the first time) Transmitting information), the terminal device may determine information of a combination of one or more of the first power headroom and the fifth power headroom information in the first plurality of first time periods.
第一种功率余量信息,终端设备确定一个或多个第一功率余量信息。第一功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率(记为P cmax,c,c为频域资源的标识)与所述终端设备发送第二SRS的功率之差,所述第二SRS包括所述第一SRS包括的至少一个SRS中的一个。比如,以图5为例,假设根据上述确定第一SRS的方式,确定时隙i上的第一SRS为SRS0和SRS1,则终端设备确定2个第一功率余量信息,分别表示为PH1,PH2。其中PH1=P cmax,c-发送SRS0的功率,PH2=P cmax,c-发送SRS1的功率。此时,在时隙i上,SRS0和SRS1会被实 际发送。因此发送SRS0的功率可以是实际发送SRS0的功率,或者估计出的发送SRS0的功率,发送SRS1的功率可以是实际发送SRS1的功率,或者估计出的发送SRS1的功率。再比如,假设根据上述确定第一SRS的方式,确定时隙i+x上的第一SRS为SRS0和SRS3,则终端设备确定2个第一功率余量信息,分别表示为PH1,PH2。其中PH1=P cmax,c-发送SRS0的功率,PH1=P cmax,c-发送SRS3的功率。此时,在时隙i+x上,SRS0不会被实际发送,SRS3会被实际发送。因此发送SRS0的功率是根据参考格式(Reference Format)确定出的功率,发送SRS3的功率可以是实际发送发送SRS3的功率,或者估计出的发送SRS3的功率。需要说明的是,终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率是终端设备根据最大发射功率能力、接入网设备通知的所述频域资源的最大发射功率、功率回退中的至少一项确定的。比如,终端功率能力为23分贝毫瓦(dBm),接入网设备通知的所述频域资源的最大发射功率为20dBm,功率回退2dBm,则终终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率等于18dBm。以下各种第一最大发射功率类似,不再赘述。 The first type of power headroom information, the terminal device determines one or more first power headroom information. The first power headroom information is the first maximum transmit power of the terminal equipment in the frequency domain resource (indicated as P cmax,c ,c is an identifier of the frequency domain resource) and the power of the second SRS is sent by the terminal device And the second SRS includes one of the at least one SRS included in the first SRS. For example, taking FIG. 5 as an example, it is assumed that, according to the manner of determining the first SRS, determining that the first SRS on the time slot i is SRS0 and SRS1, the terminal device determines two first power headroom information, which are respectively represented as PH1. PH2. Where PH1 = P cmax , c - the power to transmit SRS0, PH2 = P cmax, c - the power to transmit SRS1. At this time, on the slot i, SRS0 and SRS1 are actually transmitted. Therefore, the power of transmitting SRS0 may be the power of actually transmitting SRS0, or the estimated power of transmitting SRS0, and the power of transmitting SRS1 may be the power of actually transmitting SRS1, or the estimated power of transmitting SRS1. For another example, if it is determined that the first SRS on the time slot i+x is SRS0 and SRS3 according to the manner of determining the first SRS, the terminal device determines two first power headroom information, which are respectively denoted as PH1, PH2. Where PH1 = P cmax , c - the power to transmit SRS0, PH1 = P cmax , c - the power to transmit SRS3. At this time, on the slot i+x, SRS0 will not be actually transmitted, and SRS3 will be actually transmitted. Therefore, the power of the SRS0 is the power determined according to the reference format. The power of the SRS3 may be the power of actually transmitting the SRS3, or the estimated power of the SRS3. It should be noted that, the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource is at least the terminal device according to the maximum transmit power capability, the maximum transmit power of the frequency domain resource notified by the access network device, and the power backoff. A certain one. For example, the terminal power capability is 23 decibels milliwatts (dBm), and the maximum transmit power of the frequency domain resource notified by the access network device is 20 dBm, and the power backoff is 2 dBm, and the terminal device is the first in the frequency domain resource. The maximum transmit power is equal to 18 dBm. The following various first maximum transmit powers are similar and will not be described again.
在确定第一种功率余量信息时,所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率可以是终端设备的第一最大发射功率。这种方式最简单。所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率还可以是所述终端设备在所述频域资源的发送SRS的第一最大发射功率。这种方式计算出的PH更精确。所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率还可以是所述终端设备在所述频域资源的发送至少一个SRS中的每个SRS的第一最大发射功率,即,第一配置信息中包括的至少一个SRS中的每个SRS与一个最大发射功率关联,不同SRS关联的第一最大发射功率可以相同,也可以不同。比如,计算PH1时,使用发送SRS0所关联的第一最大发射功率,在计算PH2时,使用发送SRS1所关联的第一最大发射功率。这种方式是计算出的PH更精确。When determining the first type of power headroom information, the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may be the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device. This is the easiest way. The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of the transmit SRS of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource. The PH calculated in this way is more accurate. The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of each SRS in the at least one SRS of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource, that is, the first Each SRS in the at least one SRS included in the configuration information is associated with one maximum transmit power, and the first maximum transmit power associated with different SRSs may be the same or different. For example, when PH1 is calculated, the first maximum transmit power associated with transmitting SRS0 is used, and when PH2 is calculated, the first maximum transmit power associated with transmitting SRS1 is used. This way the calculated pH is more accurate.
第二种功率余量信息,终端设备确定一个或多个第二功率余量信息。第二功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述终端设备在第一物理信道上的功率之差。当所述物理信道包括多个信道时,所述第一物理信道为所述多个信道中的一个,当所述物理信道包括一个信道时,所述第一物理信道为所述信道。比如,假设在频域资源上,物理信道包括PUSCH,则终端设备确定1个功率余量信息。再比如,假设在频域资源上,物理信道包括PUSCH和PUCCH,则终端设备确定2个功率余量信息。The second power headroom information, the terminal device determines one or more second power headroom information. The second power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the terminal device on a first physical channel. When the physical channel includes multiple channels, the first physical channel is one of the multiple channels, and when the physical channel includes one channel, the first physical channel is the channel. For example, if the physical channel includes the PUSCH on the frequency domain resource, the terminal device determines one power headroom information. For another example, if the physical channel includes the PUSCH and the PUCCH on the frequency domain resource, the terminal device determines two power headroom information.
在确定第二种功率余量信息时,所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率可以是终端设备的最大发射功率。这种方式最简单。所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率还可以是所述终端设备在所述频域资源的发送物理信道的第一最大发射功率。这种方式计算出的PH更精确。所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率还可以是所述终端设备在所述频域资源的发送物理信道包括的至少一个信道中的每个的第一最大发射功率,不同信道关联的第一最大发射功率可以相同,也可以不同。比如,计算PUSCH的PH时,使用发送PUSCH所关联的最大发射功率,在计算PUCCH的PH时,使用发送PUCCH所关联的第一最大发射功率。这种方式是计算出的PH更精确。When determining the second power headroom information, the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may be the maximum transmit power of the terminal device. This is the easiest way. The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of the transmit physical channel of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource. The PH calculated in this way is more accurate. The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of each of the at least one channel included in the transmit physical channel of the frequency domain resource of the terminal device, different The first maximum transmit power associated with the channel may be the same or different. For example, when calculating the PH of the PUSCH, the maximum transmit power associated with transmitting the PUSCH is used, and when calculating the PH of the PUCCH, the first maximum transmit power associated with transmitting the PUCCH is used. This way the calculated pH is more accurate.
第三种功率余量信息,终端设备确定第三功率余量信息。所述第三功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述终端设备发送所述第一SRS的功率之差。比如,以图5为例,假设根据上述确定第一SRS的方式,确定时隙i上的第一SRS为SRS0和SRS1,则终端设备确定第三功率余量信息可以为,终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率-(发送SRS0的功率+发送SRS1的功率)。此时,在时隙i上,SRS0和SRS1会被实际 发送。因此发送SRS0的功率可以是实际发送SRS0的功率,或者估计出的发送SRS0的功率,发送SRS1的功率可以是实际发送SRS1的功率,或者估计出的发送SRS1的功率。再比如,假设根据上述确定第一SRS的方式,确定时隙i+x上的第一SRS为SRS0和SRS3,则终端设备确定第三功率余量信息可以为终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率-(发送SRS0的功率+发送SRS3的功率)。此时,在时隙i+x上,SRS0不会被实际发送,SRS3会被实际发送。因此发送SRS0的功率是根据参考格式(Reference Format)确定出的功率,发送SRS3的功率可以是实际发送SRS3的功率,或者估计出的发送SRS3的功率。The third power headroom information, the terminal device determines the third power headroom information. The third power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the first SRS sent by the terminal device. For example, with reference to FIG. 5, it is assumed that, according to the manner of determining the first SRS, determining that the first SRS on the time slot i is SRS0 and SRS1, the terminal device determines that the third power headroom information may be that the terminal device is in the The first maximum transmit power of the frequency domain resource - (the power of transmitting SRS0 + the power of transmitting SRS1). At this time, on the slot i, SRS0 and SRS1 are actually transmitted. Therefore, the power of transmitting SRS0 may be the power of actually transmitting SRS0, or the estimated power of transmitting SRS0, and the power of transmitting SRS1 may be the power of actually transmitting SRS1, or the estimated power of transmitting SRS1. For example, if it is determined that the first SRS on the time slot i+x is SRS0 and SRS3 according to the manner of determining the first SRS, the terminal device determines that the third power headroom information may be the terminal device in the frequency domain resource. First maximum transmit power - (power of transmitting SRS0 + power of transmitting SRS3). At this time, on the slot i+x, SRS0 will not be actually transmitted, and SRS3 will be actually transmitted. Therefore, the power of transmitting SRS0 is the power determined according to the reference format (Reference Format), and the power of transmitting SRS3 may be the power of actually transmitting SRS3, or the estimated power of transmitting SRS3.
在确定第三种功率余量信息时,所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率可以是终端设备的第一最大发射功率。这种方式最简单。所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率还可以是所述终端设备在所述频域资源的发送SRS的第一最大发射功率。这种方式计算出的PH更精确。When determining the third power headroom information, the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may be the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device. This is the easiest way. The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of the transmit SRS of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource. The PH calculated in this way is more accurate.
第四种功率余量信息,终端设备确定第四功率余量信息。第四功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述终端设备在所述物理信道上的功率之差。比如,假设在频域资源上,物理信道包括PUSCH(即在该频域资源上,终端设备不能同时发送PUCCH和PUSCH),则终端设备确定第四功率余量信息为,所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率-终端设备在PUSCH上的功率。如果PUSCH在第一时间段被实际发送,则在PUSCH的功率可以是实际发送PUSCH的功率,或者估计出的发送PUSCH的功率。如果PUSCH在第一时间段没有被实际发送,则在PUSCH上的功率是根据参考格式(Reference Format)确定出的功率。再比如,假设在频域资源上,物理信道包括PUSCH和PUCCH(即在该频域资源上,终端设备可以同时发送PUCCH和PUSCH),则终端设备确定第四功率余量信息为,所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率-(终端设备在PUSCH上的功率+终端设备在PUCCH上的功率)。如果PUSCH和PUCCH在第一时间段被实际发送,则在PUSCH和PUCCH的功率可以是实际发送PUSCH和PUCCH的功率,或者估计出的发送PUSCH和PUCCH的功率。如果PUSCH或PUCCH在第一时间段没有被实际发送,则在PUSCH或PUCCH上的功率是根据参考格式(Reference Format)确定出的功率。如果PUSCH和PUCCH在第一时间段没有被实际发送,则在PUSCH和PUCCH上的功率是根据参考格式(Reference Format)确定出的功率。The fourth power headroom information, the terminal device determines the fourth power headroom information. The fourth power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the terminal device on the physical channel. For example, if the physical channel includes the PUSCH on the frequency domain resource, that is, the terminal device cannot transmit the PUCCH and the PUSCH simultaneously on the frequency domain resource, the terminal device determines that the fourth power headroom information is the frequency domain resource. First Maximum Transmit Power - The power of the terminal equipment on the PUSCH. If the PUSCH is actually transmitted in the first time period, the power in the PUSCH may be the power of actually transmitting the PUSCH or the estimated power of the transmitted PUSCH. If the PUSCH is not actually transmitted during the first time period, the power on the PUSCH is the power determined according to the Reference Format. For example, if the physical channel includes the PUSCH and the PUCCH on the frequency domain resource, that is, the terminal device can simultaneously transmit the PUCCH and the PUSCH on the frequency domain resource, the terminal device determines that the fourth power headroom information is the frequency. The first maximum transmit power of the domain resource - (power of the terminal device on the PUSCH + power of the terminal device on the PUCCH). If the PUSCH and the PUCCH are actually transmitted in the first time period, the power in the PUSCH and the PUCCH may be the power of actually transmitting the PUSCH and the PUCCH, or the estimated power of the transmitted PUSCH and the PUCCH. If the PUSCH or PUCCH is not actually transmitted during the first time period, the power on the PUSCH or PUCCH is the power determined according to the Reference Format. If the PUSCH and the PUCCH are not actually transmitted during the first time period, the power on the PUSCH and the PUCCH is the power determined according to the Reference Format.
在确定第四种功率余量信息,所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率可以是终端设备的第一最大发射功率。这种方式最简单。所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率还可以是所述终端设备在所述频域资源的发送物理信道的第一最大发射功率。这种方式计算出的PH更精确。In determining the fourth power headroom information, the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may be the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device. This is the easiest way. The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of the transmit physical channel of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource. The PH calculated in this way is more accurate.
第五种功率余量信息,终端设备确定第五功率余量信息。第五功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与第一发射功率之差,其中,所述第一发射功率为所述终端设备发送所述第一SRS的功率与在所述物理信道上的功率之和。具体计算方法与前面方式类似,在此不作赘述。The fifth power headroom information, the terminal device determines the fifth power headroom information. The fifth power headroom information is a difference between the first maximum transmit power and the first transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource, where the first transmit power is sent by the terminal device to the first SRS The sum of the power and the power on the physical channel. The specific calculation method is similar to the previous method, and will not be described here.
在确定第五种功率余量信息时,所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率可以是终端设备的第一最大发射功率。这种方式最简单。When determining the fifth power headroom information, the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may be the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device. This is the easiest way.
上述各种功率余量信息中,第一种功率余量信息和第二种功率余量信息最详细,但是在上报功率余量信息时,信令开销最大。第三种功率余量信息和第四种功率余量信息较详细,信令开销较小。第五种功率余量信息信令开销最小。Among the above various power headroom information, the first power headroom information and the second power headroom information are the most detailed, but the signaling overhead is the largest when reporting the power headroom information. The third power headroom information and the fourth power headroom information are more detailed, and the signaling overhead is small. The fifth power headroom information signaling overhead is minimal.
上述各种功率余量信息中,一种可能的组合是,第一种功率余量信息和第二种功率余量 信息组合。该组合方式可以实现上报最详细的功率余量信息。但是信息量比较大。另一种可能的组合方式是,第三种功率余量信息和第四种功率余量信息组合。该组合方式可以实现上报较详细的功率余量信息。但是信息量比较小。One of the possible combinations of the various power headroom information described above is a combination of the first power headroom information and the second power headroom information. This combination method can report the most detailed power headroom information. But the amount of information is relatively large. Another possible combination is a combination of a third power headroom information and a fourth power headroom information. The combination mode can report more detailed power headroom information. But the amount of information is relatively small.
当频域资源被配置成不能发送物理信道(如PUSCH和/或PUCCH),只能发送至少一个SRS时,终端设备可以确定第一种功率余量信息,第三种功率余量信息中的一种或多种功率余量信息。When the frequency domain resource is configured to be unable to transmit a physical channel (such as PUSCH and/or PUCCH), and only at least one SRS can be sent, the terminal device can determine the first type of power headroom information, and one of the third power headroom information. One or more power headroom information.
终端设备可以根据预配置的规则确定哪种功率余量信息,或者哪几种功率余量信息。比如,该预配置的规则可以是确定第一种功率余量信息,或者确定第一种功率余量信息和第二种功率余量信息,或者确定第三种功率余量信息和第四种功率余量信息,或者确定第五种功率余量信息,或者确定第一种功率余量信息和第三种功率余量信息等。比如,预配置的规则可以是根据是否接收到第二配置信息,确定功率余量信息的种类。当终端设备接收到第二配置信息,终端设备确定第一种功率余量信息和第二种功率余量信息,或者确定第三种功率余量信息和第四种功率余量信息。当终端设备没有接收到第二配置信息,终端设备确定第五种功率余量信息。The terminal device can determine which power headroom information, or which power headroom information, according to pre-configured rules. For example, the pre-configured rule may be determining the first type of power headroom information, or determining the first type of power headroom information and the second type of power headroom information, or determining the third type of power headroom information and the fourth type of power. The remaining amount information, or the fifth power headroom information is determined, or the first power headroom information and the third power headroom information are determined. For example, the pre-configured rule may be to determine the type of power headroom information according to whether the second configuration information is received. When the terminal device receives the second configuration information, the terminal device determines the first power headroom information and the second power headroom information, or determines the third power headroom information and the fourth power headroom information. When the terminal device does not receive the second configuration information, the terminal device determines the fifth power headroom information.
预配置的规则可以在协议中固定,或者通过接入网设备发送给终端设备。当所述预配置的规则通过接入网设备发送给终端设备时,一种实现方式中,终端设备通过无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)层消息,媒体接入控制(Media Access Control,MAC)层消息,或者物理层消息可以接收预配置的规则。其中,RRC层消息可以是系统广播消息,或者RRC层消息可以是专用RRC消息。本发明不作限制。The pre-configured rules can be fixed in the protocol or sent to the terminal device through the access network device. When the pre-configured rule is sent to the terminal device by using the access network device, in an implementation manner, the terminal device passes the Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer message, and the media access control (MAC) Layer messages, or physical layer messages, can receive pre-configured rules. The RRC layer message may be a system broadcast message, or the RRC layer message may be a dedicated RRC message. The invention is not limited.
一种实现方式中,终端设备或者终端设备的MAC层实体可以从物理层获得第一种功率余量信息至第五种功率余量信息中的至少一种。终端设备或者终端设备的MAC层实体还可以从物理层获得频域资源的第一最大发射功率。终端设备或者终端设备的MAC层实体还可以从物理层获得频域资源的用于发送SRS的第一最大发射功率和/或用于发送物理信道的第一最大发射功率。当物理信道或SRS在第一时间段没有被实际发送时,终端设备或者终端设备的MAC层实体还可以从物理层获得物理信道或SRS的参考格式。In an implementation manner, the MAC layer entity of the terminal device or the terminal device may obtain at least one of the first power headroom information and the fifth power headroom information from the physical layer. The MAC layer entity of the terminal device or the terminal device may also obtain the first maximum transmit power of the frequency domain resource from the physical layer. The MAC layer entity of the terminal device or the terminal device may also obtain, from the physical layer, a first maximum transmit power of the frequency domain resource for transmitting the SRS and/or a first maximum transmit power for transmitting the physical channel. When the physical channel or the SRS is not actually transmitted in the first time period, the MAC layer entity of the terminal device or the terminal device may also obtain a reference format of the physical channel or the SRS from the physical layer.
一种实现方式中,终端设备中的处理器201可用于确定功率余量信息。In one implementation, the processor 201 in the terminal device can be used to determine power headroom information.
步骤S105,终端设备向接入网设备发送功率余量信息,相应的,接入网设备接收终端设备发送的功率余量信息。Step S105: The terminal device sends power headroom information to the access network device, and correspondingly, the access network device receives the power headroom information sent by the terminal device.
功率余量信息中包括步骤S104中确定的一个或多个第一功率余量信息,一个或多个第二功率余量信息,第三功率余量信息,第四功率余量信息,第五功率余量信息中的一个或多个信息。The power headroom information includes one or more first power headroom information determined in step S104, one or more second power headroom information, third power headroom information, fourth power headroom information, and fifth power. One or more pieces of information in the balance information.
进一步的,功率余量信息中还可以包括终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率。终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率可以是终端设备的第一最大发射功率。所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率还可以是所述终端设备在所述频域资源的发送SRS的第一最大发射功率。所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率还可以是所述终端设备在所述频域资源的发送至少一个SRS中的每个SRS的第一最大发射功率,即,第一配置信息中包括的至少一个SRS中的每个SRS与一个第一最大发射功率关联,不同SRS关联的第一最大发射功率可以相同,也可以不同。比如,计算PH1时,使用发送SRS0所关联的最大发射功率,在计算PH2时,使用发送SRS1所关联的第一最大发射功率。所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率还可以是所述终端设备在所述频域资源的发送物理信道的第 一最大发射功率。Further, the power headroom information may further include a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource. The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may be the first maximum transmit power of the terminal device. The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of the transmit SRS of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource. The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of each SRS in the at least one SRS of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource, that is, the first Each SRS in the at least one SRS included in the configuration information is associated with a first maximum transmit power, and the first maximum transmit power associated with different SRSs may be the same or different. For example, when calculating PH1, the maximum transmit power associated with transmitting SRS0 is used, and when PH2 is calculated, the first maximum transmit power associated with transmitting SRS1 is used. The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource may also be the first maximum transmit power of the transmit physical channel of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource.
下面描述终端设备向接入网设备发送功率余量信息中可以包括的内容。需要说明的是,下述各种内容中,包括的信息P用于指示终端设备确定PH时,是否进行功率回退,V用于指示PH值是基于实际传输(Real transmission)还是基于参考格式(Reference Format),R表示保留位。虚线框表示内容是可选的。信息P,V与PH可以成对出现,如图6~图11所示,也可以只有PH,没有P和/或V。另外,内容1~内容6中的PH可以占用6比特,如图6~图11所示,还可以占用其它数量个比特,比如占用7比特。本发明只是对功率余量信息包括的内容进行描述,并不限定PH所占用的比特个数。The content that can be included in the power headroom information sent by the terminal device to the access network device is described below. It should be noted that, in the following various contents, the information P included is used to indicate whether the power back-off is performed when the terminal device determines the PH, and V is used to indicate whether the PH value is based on actual transmission (Real transmission) or based on a reference format ( Reference Format), R represents a reserved bit. A dashed box indicates that the content is optional. The information P, V and PH may appear in pairs, as shown in Figures 6 to 11, or only PH, without P and / or V. In addition, the PHs in the content 1 to the content 6 can occupy 6 bits. As shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 11 , other numbers of bits can be occupied, for example, 7 bits are occupied. The present invention only describes the content included in the power headroom information, and does not limit the number of bits occupied by the PH.
内容1,包括如下信息: Content 1, including the following information:
在步骤S104中确定的一个或多个第一功率余量信息,其中第一功率余量信息可以是Type3,也可以是新的Type,本发明不作限制。其中,一个或多个第一功率余量信息可以按第一SRS中包括的至少一个SRS的标识信息从小到大(或从大到小)的顺序排列。图6给出了内容1的一种可能的示例。如图6所示,PH(SRS0)~PH(SRSn)表示第一SRS中包括的n个SRS对应的第一功率余量信息。可选的,内容1还包括终端设备在频域资源上的第一最大发射功率。进一步的,内容1可以替换为每个PH后面都有一个与之关联的第一最大发射功率,比如,内容1可以按顺序包括{PH(SRS0),Pcmax SRS0},{PH(SRS1),Pcmax SRS1}等。本发明不对一个或多个第一功率余量信息的顺序进行限制。The one or more first power headroom information determined in step S104, wherein the first power headroom information may be Type3 or a new type, which is not limited in the present invention. The one or more first power headroom information may be arranged in the order of small to large (or large to small) identification information of the at least one SRS included in the first SRS. Figure 6 shows a possible example of Content 1. As shown in FIG. 6, PH (SRS0) to PH (SRSn) indicate first power headroom information corresponding to n SRSs included in the first SRS. Optionally, the content 1 further includes a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the frequency domain resource. Further, the content 1 may be replaced by a PH with a first maximum transmit power associated with each PH. For example, the content 1 may include {PH(SRS0), Pcmax SRS0}, {PH(SRS1), Pcmax in order. SRS1} and so on. The present invention does not limit the order of one or more first power headroom information.
内容2,包括如下信息: Content 2, including the following information:
在步骤S104中确定的第三功率余量信息,其中第三功率余量信息可以是Type3,也可以是新的Type,本发明不作限制。图7给了内容2的一种可能的示例。如图7所示,PH(SRS)表示第一SRS的第三功率余量信息。可选的,内容2还包括终端设备在频域资源上的第一最大发射功率。The third power headroom information determined in step S104, wherein the third power headroom information may be Type 3 or a new type, which is not limited in the present invention. Figure 7 gives a possible example of Content 2. As shown in FIG. 7, PH (SRS) represents the third power headroom information of the first SRS. Optionally, the content 2 further includes a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the frequency domain resource.
内容3,包括如下信息: Content 3, including the following information:
在步骤S104中确定的一个第二功率余量信息,其中第二功率余量信息可以是Type1,即当物理信道是PUSCH信道时的功率余量信息。第二功率余量信息可以是PUCCH的功率余量信息,即当物理信道是PUCCH信道时的功率余量信息。图8给了内容3的一种可能的示例。如图8所示,PH(Type1)表示PUSCH的第二功率余量信息。可选的,内容3还包括终端设备在频域资源上的第一最大发射功率。内容4,包括如下信息:A second power headroom information determined in step S104, wherein the second power headroom information may be Type1, that is, power headroom information when the physical channel is a PUSCH channel. The second power headroom information may be power headroom information of the PUCCH, that is, power headroom information when the physical channel is a PUCCH channel. Figure 8 gives a possible example of Content 3. As shown in FIG. 8, PH (Type 1) represents the second power headroom information of the PUSCH. Optionally, the content 3 further includes a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the frequency domain resource. Content 4, including the following information:
在步骤S104中确定的一个第二功率余量信息,其中第二功率余量信息是Type2,即当物理信道是PUSCH和PUCCH信道时的功率余量信息。第二功率余量信息可以是PUCCH的功率余量信息,即当物理信道是PUCCH信道时的功率余量信息。图9给了内容4的一种可能的示例。如图9所示,PH(Type2)表示PUSCH和PUCCH的第二功率余量信息。可选的,内容4还包括终端设备在频域资源上的第一最大发射功率。内容5,包括如下信息:A second power headroom information determined in step S104, wherein the second power headroom information is Type2, that is, power headroom information when the physical channel is a PUSCH and a PUCCH channel. The second power headroom information may be power headroom information of the PUCCH, that is, power headroom information when the physical channel is a PUCCH channel. Figure 9 gives a possible example of Content 4. As shown in FIG. 9, PH (Type 2) represents second power headroom information of PUSCH and PUCCH. Optionally, the content 4 further includes a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the frequency domain resource. Content 5, including the following information:
在步骤S104中确定的第五功率余量信息。图10给了内容5的一种可能的示例。如图10所示,PH(SRS+PUSCH)表示第一SRS和物理信道的第五功率余量信息。其中,物理信道是PUSCH。可选的,内容5还包括终端设备在频域资源上的第一最大发射功率。The fifth power headroom information determined in step S104. Figure 10 gives a possible example of Content 5. As shown in FIG. 10, PH (SRS+PUSCH) represents the fifth power headroom information of the first SRS and the physical channel. The physical channel is a PUSCH. Optionally, the content 5 further includes a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the frequency domain resource.
内容6,包括如下信息: Content 6, including the following information:
在步骤S104中确定的第五功率余量信息。图11给了内容6的一种可能的示例。如图11所示,PH(SRS+PUSCH+PUCCH)表示第一SRS和物理信道的第五功率余量信息,其中,物理信道是PUSCH和PUSCH时。可选的,内容6还包括终端设备在频域资源上的第一最大发射功 率。终端设备确定的功率余量信息可以包括上述内容1~内容6中的一项。或者,终端设备确定的功率余量信息可以包括上述内容1~内容6中多项的组合。下面对多项的组合进行描述。需要说明的是,本发明不对下面各种组合方式包括的各项内容在功率余量信息中出现的先后顺序进行限制。The fifth power headroom information determined in step S104. Figure 11 gives a possible example of content 6. As shown in FIG. 11, the PH (SRS+PUSCH+PUCCH) represents the fifth power headroom information of the first SRS and the physical channel, where the physical channel is the PUSCH and the PUSCH. Optionally, the content 6 further includes a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the frequency domain resource. The power headroom information determined by the terminal device may include one of Contents 1 to 6 above. Alternatively, the power headroom information determined by the terminal device may include a combination of a plurality of the above contents 1 to 6. The combination of multiples is described below. It should be noted that the present invention does not limit the order in which the various contents included in the following combinations are present in the power headroom information.
一种可能的组合方式1是,内容2+内容3。此时,功率余量信息体现的是SRS和PUSCH在频域资源上同时传输时的功率余量信息。可选的,在该组合方式中,如果内容2和内容3中的最大发射功率相同,则该组合中可以只包括一个最大发射功率,该一个最大发射功率位于该组合的最后,可以节省信令开销。One possible combination 1 is content 2+ content 3. At this time, the power headroom information reflects the power headroom information when the SRS and the PUSCH are simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resources. Optionally, in the combination mode, if the maximum transmit power in the content 2 and the content 3 is the same, the combination may include only one maximum transmit power, and the one maximum transmit power is located at the end of the combination, which may save signaling. Overhead.
另一种可能的组合方式2是,内容3+内容5。此时,功率余量信息体现的是SRS和PUSCH在频域资源上同时传输时的功率余量信息。可选的,在该组合方式中,如果内容3和内容5中的最大发射功率相同,则该组合中可以只包括一个最大发射功率,该一个最大发射功率位于该组合的最后,可以节省信令开销。Another possible combination 2 is content 3 + content 5. At this time, the power headroom information reflects the power headroom information when the SRS and the PUSCH are simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resources. Optionally, in the combination mode, if the maximum transmit power in the content 3 and the content 5 is the same, the combination may include only one maximum transmit power, and the one maximum transmit power is located at the end of the combination, which may save signaling. Overhead.
另一种可能的组合方式3是,内容2+内容3+内容5。此时,功率余量信息体现的是SRS和PUSCH在频域资源上同时传输时的功率余量信息。此时,功率余量信息体现的是SRS和PUSCH在频域资源上同时传输时的功率余量信息。与组合方式1相比,功率余量信息更精确,但信令开销也更大。可选的,在该组合方式中,如果内容2和内容3中的最大发射功率相同,则该组合中可以只包括一个最大发射功率,该一个最大发射功率位于该组合的最后,可以节省信令开销。Another possible combination 3 is content 2+ content 3 + content 5. At this time, the power headroom information reflects the power headroom information when the SRS and the PUSCH are simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resources. At this time, the power headroom information reflects the power headroom information when the SRS and the PUSCH are simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resources. Compared with the combination mode 1, the power headroom information is more accurate, but the signaling overhead is also larger. Optionally, in the combination mode, if the maximum transmit power in the content 2 and the content 3 is the same, the combination may include only one maximum transmit power, and the one maximum transmit power is located at the end of the combination, which may save signaling. Overhead.
另一种可能的组合方式4是,内容4+内容6。此时,功率余量信息体现的是SRS和PUSCH和PUCCH在频域资源上同时传输时的功率余量信息。可选的,在该组合方式中,如果内容4和内容6中的最大发射功率相同,则该组合中可以只包括一个最大发射功率,该一个最大发射功率位于该组合的最后,可以节省信令开销。Another possible combination 4 is content 4 + content 6. At this time, the power headroom information reflects power headroom information when the SRS and the PUSCH and the PUCCH are simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resources. Optionally, in the combination mode, if the maximum transmit power in the content 4 and the content 6 are the same, the combination may include only one maximum transmit power, and the one maximum transmit power is located at the end of the combination, which may save signaling. Overhead.
另一种可能的组合方式5是,内容3+内容4+内容6。此时,功率余量信息体现的是SRS和PUSCH和PUCCH在频域资源上同时传输时的功率余量信息。可选的,在该组合方式中,如果内容3,内容4和内容6中的最大发射功率相同,则该组合中可以只包括一个最大发射功率,该一个最大发射功率位于该组合的最后,可以节省信令开销。与组合方式4相比,功率余量信息更精确,但信令开销也更大。Another possible combination 5 is content 3 + content 4 + content 6. At this time, the power headroom information reflects power headroom information when the SRS and the PUSCH and the PUCCH are simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resources. Optionally, in the combination mode, if the content 3, the maximum transmission power in the content 4 and the content 6 are the same, the combination may include only one maximum transmission power, and the one maximum transmission power is located at the end of the combination, Save signaling overhead. Compared with the combination mode 4, the power headroom information is more accurate, but the signaling overhead is also larger.
另一种可能的组合方式6是,内容2+内容3+内容4+内容6。此时,功率余量信息体现的是SRS和PUSCH和PUCCH在频域资源上同时传输时的功率余量信息。可选的,在该组合方式中,如果内容2,内容3,内容4和内容6中的最大发射功率相同,则该组合中可以只包括一个最大发射功率,该一个最大发射功率位于该组合的最后,可以节省信令开销。与组合方式4相比,功率余量信息更精确,但信令开销也更大。Another possible combination 6 is content 2+ content 3 + content 4 + content 6. At this time, the power headroom information reflects power headroom information when the SRS and the PUSCH and the PUCCH are simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resources. Optionally, in the combination mode, if the maximum transmission power in the content 2, the content 3, the content 4, and the content 6 is the same, the combination may include only one maximum transmission power, and the one maximum transmission power is located in the combination. Finally, signaling overhead can be saved. Compared with the combination mode 4, the power headroom information is more accurate, but the signaling overhead is also larger.
另一种可能的组合方式7是,内容1+内容2。此时功率余量信息体现的是SRS在频域资源上同时传输时的功率余量信息。如果内容1和内容2中的最大发射功率相同,则该组合中可以只包括一个最大发射功率,该一个最大发射功率位于该组合的最后,可以节省信令开销。Another possible combination 7 is content 1 + content 2. At this time, the power headroom information reflects the power headroom information when the SRS is simultaneously transmitted on the frequency domain resource. If the maximum transmit power in content 1 and content 2 is the same, the combination may include only one maximum transmit power, and the one maximum transmit power is at the end of the combination, which may save signaling overhead.
步骤S105中的功率余量信息,可以是指对功率余量计算值进行量化后的信息,具体的量化手段可以是在一定的值区间内,对功率余量以均匀步长,或者是非均匀步长的方式进行量化。The power headroom information in step S105 may be information obtained by quantizing the calculated value of the power headroom. The specific quantization means may be a uniform step size for the power headroom or a non-uniform step in a certain value interval. Long way to quantify.
需要说明的是,上述可能的组合方式只是示例性的描述,任何能够实现本发明目的的组合方式均在本发明实施例保护范围之内。It should be noted that the above-mentioned possible combinations are merely exemplary descriptions, and any combination that can achieve the object of the present invention is within the protection scope of the embodiments of the present invention.
可选的,终端设备可以根据预配置的规则上报包括内容1~内容6中的一个的功率余量信息,或者上报包括多个内容的组合的功率余量信息。比如,当终端设备获得第二配置信息,第二终端设备上报包括内容1和/或内容2和/或包含内容1和/或内容2的可能的组合方式的功率余量信息。再比如,当终端设备没有获得第二配置信息,第二终端设备上报的功率余量信息中不包括内容1和/或内容2的可能的组合方式。再比如,接入网设备向终端设备发送第三指示信息,用于指示终端设备上报哪个或哪些内容的组合。Optionally, the terminal device may report the power headroom information including one of the content 1 to the content 6 according to the pre-configured rule, or report the power headroom information including the combination of the multiple content. For example, when the terminal device obtains the second configuration information, the second terminal device reports power headroom information including content 1 and/or content 2 and/or possible combinations including content 1 and/or content 2. For another example, when the terminal device does not obtain the second configuration information, the power headroom information reported by the second terminal device does not include the possible combination manner of the content 1 and/or the content 2. For example, the access network device sends the third indication information to the terminal device, which is used to indicate which combination of the content or the content is reported by the terminal device.
可选的,功率余量信息中还包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一SRS包括的至少一个SRS中的一个SRS的标识信息,所述第一指示信息与所述第一功率余量信息关联;当第一SRS只包括第一配置信息中配置的至少一个SRS的一部分时,终端设备上报与第一功率余量信息对应的SRS的标识信息。此时,接入网设备对第一SRS的理解与终端设备一致,有利于更好的进行资源分配和/或功率控制。Optionally, the power headroom information further includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate identifier information of one SRS in the at least one SRS included in the first SRS, where the first indication information is The first power headroom information is associated; when the first SRS includes only a part of the at least one SRS configured in the first configuration information, the terminal device reports the identifier information of the SRS corresponding to the first power headroom information. At this time, the understanding of the first SRS by the access network device is consistent with the terminal device, which is advantageous for better resource allocation and/or power control.
可选的,如果终端设备被配置了多个频域资源,则终端设备会确定每个频域资源上的功率余量信息。进一步的,功率余量信息中还包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述频域资源的标识信息。第二指示信息的一种实现方式是采用位图的方式。比如,在功率余量信息中包括一个位图,位图中每个比特与一个频域资源关联。位图中的比特值为0,表示终端设备上报与该比特关联的频域资源的功率余量信息。Optionally, if the terminal device is configured with multiple frequency domain resources, the terminal device determines power headroom information on each frequency domain resource. Further, the power headroom information further includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the identifier information of the frequency domain resource. One way to implement the second indication information is to use a bitmap. For example, a bitmap is included in the power headroom information, and each bit in the bitmap is associated with a frequency domain resource. The bit value in the bitmap is 0, indicating that the terminal device reports the power headroom information of the frequency domain resource associated with the bit.
终端设备可以通过MAC层消息或RRC层消息向接入网设备发送功率余量信息。The terminal device may send power headroom information to the access network device through a MAC layer message or an RRC layer message.
一种实现方式中,终端设备中的收发器204可用于发送所述功率余量信息,或者终端设备中的处理器201控制收发器204发送所述功率余量信息。In one implementation, the transceiver 204 in the terminal device can be configured to transmit the power headroom information, or the processor 201 in the terminal device controls the transceiver 204 to transmit the power headroom information.
一种实现方式中,接入网设备中的收发器302可用于接收所述功率余量信息,或者接入网设备中的处理器301控制收发器302接收所述功率余量信息。In one implementation, the transceiver 302 in the access network device can be configured to receive the power headroom information, or the processor 301 in the access network device controls the transceiver 302 to receive the power headroom information.
本发明实施例还提供一种装置(例如,集成电路、无线设备、电路模块等)用于实现上述方法。实现本文描述的装置可以是自立设备或者可以是较大设备的一部分。设备可以是(i)自立的IC;(ii)具有一个或多个IC的集合,其可包括用于存储数据和/或指令的存储器IC;(iii)RFIC,诸如RF接收机或RF发射机/接收机;(iv)ASIC,诸如移动站调制解调器;(v)可嵌入在其他设备内的模块;(vi)接收机、蜂窝电话、无线设备、手持机、或者移动单元;(vii)其他等等。The embodiments of the present invention further provide a device (for example, an integrated circuit, a wireless device, a circuit module, etc.) for implementing the above method. Implementations of the devices described herein may be stand-alone devices or may be part of a larger device. The device may be (i) a self-contained IC; (ii) a collection of one or more ICs, which may include a memory IC for storing data and/or instructions; (iii) an RFIC, such as an RF receiver or RF transmitter (iv) an ASIC, such as a mobile station modem; (v) a module that can be embedded in other devices; (vi) a receiver, a cellular phone, a wireless device, a handset, or a mobile unit; (vii) other, etc. Wait.
本发明实施例提供的方法和装置,可以应用于终端设备或网络设备(可以统称为无线设备)。该终端设备或网络设备或无线设备可以包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层,以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit,MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统,例如,Linux操作系统、Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、以及即时通信软件等应用。并且,在本发明实施例中,本发明实施例并不限定方法的执行主体的具体结构,只要能够通过运行记录有本发明实施例的方法的代码的程序,以根据本发明实施例的传输信号的方法进行通信即可,例如,本发明实施例的无线通信的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备,或者,是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。The method and apparatus provided by the embodiments of the present invention may be applied to a terminal device or a network device (which may be collectively referred to as a wireless device). The terminal device or network device or wireless device may include a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer. The hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and a memory (also referred to as main memory). The operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through a process, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a Windows operating system. The application layer includes applications such as browsers, contacts, word processing software, and instant messaging software. Moreover, in the embodiment of the present invention, the embodiment of the present invention does not limit the specific structure of the execution body of the method, as long as the transmission signal according to the embodiment of the present invention can be executed by running a program recording the code of the method of the embodiment of the present invention. The method can be communicated. For example, the execution body of the method for wireless communication in the embodiment of the present invention may be a terminal device or a network device, or a function module that can call a program and execute a program in the terminal device or the network device.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包 括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本发明实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘Solid State Disk(SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in accordance with embodiments of the present invention are generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transfer to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (SSD)).
应理解,在本发明实施例的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本发明实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that, in various embodiments of the embodiments of the present invention, the size of the sequence numbers of the foregoing processes does not mean the order of execution sequence, and the order of execution of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and the present invention should not be The implementation of the embodiments constitutes any limitation.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided by the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other manners. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For example, the division of the unit is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. In addition, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本发明实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者接入网设备等)执行本发明实施例各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(ROM,Read-Only Memory)、随机存取存储器(RAM,Random Access Memory)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The functions may be stored in a computer readable storage medium if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the embodiments of the present invention, or the part contributing to the prior art or the part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium. The instructions include a plurality of instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or an access network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present invention. The foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like. .
以上所述,仅为本发明实施例的具体实施方式,但本发明实施例的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本发明实施例揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本发明实施例的保护范围之内。The foregoing is only a specific embodiment of the embodiments of the present invention, but the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present invention is not limited thereto, and any person skilled in the art can easily use the technical scope disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention. All changes or substitutions are contemplated to be within the scope of the embodiments of the invention.

Claims (42)

  1. 一种无线通信的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method of wireless communication, comprising:
    终端设备获得第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置频域资源的至少一个侦听参考信号(SRS);The terminal device obtains first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure at least one listening reference signal (SRS) of the frequency domain resource;
    所述终端设备根据所述第一配置信息确定所述频域资源的第一时间段上的第一SRS,所述第一SRS包括所述至少一个SRS中的一个或多个;Determining, by the terminal device, the first SRS on the first time period of the frequency domain resource according to the first configuration information, where the first SRS includes one or more of the at least one SRS;
    所述终端设备根据所述第一SRS和所述频域资源的所述第一时间段上的物理信道确定所述频域资源的功率余量信息;Determining, by the terminal device, power headroom information of the frequency domain resource according to the physical channel on the first time period of the first SRS and the frequency domain resource;
    所述终端设备在所述第一时间段上发送所述功率余量信息。The terminal device sends the power headroom information on the first time period.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述物理信道包括物理上行共享信道和/或物理上行控制信道。The method of claim 1, wherein the physical channel comprises a physical uplink shared channel and/or a physical uplink control channel.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括如下至少一项:The method according to any one of claims 1 or 2, wherein the first configuration information comprises at least one of the following:
    用于指示所述至少一个SRS的发送方式的指示信息,其中,所述发送方式包括:非周期性的发送方式,或半静态发送方式,或周期性的发送方式;And indication information for indicating a sending manner of the at least one SRS, where the sending manner includes: an aperiodic sending manner, or a semi-static sending manner, or a periodic sending manner;
    用于指示所述至少一个SRS的功能的指示信息,其中所述功能包括:用于基于码本(CodeBook)的传输,和/或用于基于非码本的传输,和/或用于SRS切换,和/或用于波束管理;Instructing information indicating a function of the at least one SRS, wherein the function comprises: for codebook based transmission, and/or for non-codebook based transmission, and/or for SRS handover And/or for beam management;
    所述至少一个SRS的时域位置信息;Time domain location information of the at least one SRS;
    所述至少一个SRS的标识信息;Identification information of the at least one SRS;
    所述频域资源的标识信息。Identification information of the frequency domain resource.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据所述第一配置信息确定所述第一SRS,包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the determining, by the terminal device, the first SRS according to the first configuration information comprises:
    所述终端设备根据所述至少一个SRS的发送方式,确定所述第一SRS;和/或,Determining, by the terminal device, the first SRS according to a sending manner of the at least one SRS; and/or,
    所述终端设备根据所述至少一个SRS的功能,确定所述第一SRS;和/或,Determining, by the terminal device, the first SRS according to a function of the at least one SRS; and/or,
    所述终端设备根据所述至少一个SRS在所述第一时间段中的时域位置,确定所述第一SRS;和/或,Determining, by the terminal device, the first SRS according to a time domain location of the at least one SRS in the first time period; and/or,
    所述终端设备根据所述至少一个SRS的标识信息,确定所述第一SRS;或者,Determining, by the terminal device, the first SRS according to the identifier information of the at least one SRS; or
    所述第一SRS包括所述至少一个SRS中的所有SRS。The first SRS includes all SRSs in the at least one SRS.
  5. 根据1至4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息包括:The method of any one of 1 to 4, wherein the power headroom information comprises:
    一个或多个第一功率余量信息,其中,所述第一功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述终端设备发送第二SRS的功率之差,所述第二SRS包括所述第一SRS包括的至少一个SRS中的一个;以及,One or more first power headroom information, wherein the first power headroom information is a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the second SRS sent by the terminal device Poor, the second SRS includes one of at least one SRS included in the first SRS; and
    一个或多个第二功率余量信息,其中,所述第二功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述终端设备在第一物理信道上的功率之差,且当所述物理信道包括多个信道时,所述第一物理信道为所述多个信道中的一个,当所述物理信道包括一个信道时,所述第一物理信道为所述信道。One or more second power headroom information, wherein the second power headroom information is a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and the terminal device is on a first physical channel a difference in power, and when the physical channel includes a plurality of channels, the first physical channel is one of the plurality of channels, and when the physical channel includes a channel, the first physical channel is a Said channel.
  6. 根据1至5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息包括:The method of any of 1 to 5, wherein the power headroom information comprises:
    第三功率余量信息,其中,所述第三功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述终端设备发送所述第一SRS的功率之差;以及,a third power headroom information, wherein the third power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the first SRS sent by the terminal device; as well as,
    第四功率余量信息,其中,所述第四功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述终端设备在所述物理信道上的功率之差。And a fourth power headroom information, where the fourth power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the terminal device on the physical channel.
  7. 根据1至6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息包括:The method of any one of 1 to 6, wherein the power headroom information comprises:
    第五功率余量信息,其中,所述第五功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与第一发射功率之差,其中,所述第一发射功率为所述终端设备发送所述第一SRS的功率与在所述物理信道上的功率之和。a fifth power headroom information, where the fifth power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device and the first transmit power of the frequency domain resource, where the first transmit power And transmitting, by the terminal device, a sum of power of the first SRS and power of the physical channel.
  8. 根据权利要求5至7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 5 to 7, further comprising:
    所述终端设备获得第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于指示:The terminal device obtains second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used to indicate:
    所述终端设备分别接收物理信道和SRS的功率控制命令;或者Receiving, by the terminal device, a power control command of a physical channel and an SRS, respectively; or
    所述终端设备分别接收所述频域资源上的物理信道和所述频域资源上的SRS的功率控制命令;或者Receiving, by the terminal device, a physical channel on the frequency domain resource and a power control command of an SRS on the frequency domain resource, respectively; or
    所述终端设备用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率,其中,用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率与用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同。The second maximum transmit power used by the terminal device to transmit the SRS and the second maximum transmit power used on the physical channel, where the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS and the second for transmitting on the physical channel The maximum transmit power is different.
    所述终端设备用于在所述频域资源上发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在所述频域资源上的物理信道上的第二最大发射功率,其中,用于在所述频域资源上发送SRS的第二最大发射功率与用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同。Transmitting, by the terminal device, a second maximum transmit power of the SRS and a second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource on the frequency domain resource, where The second maximum transmit power of the SRS transmitted on the domain resource is different from the second maximum transmit power used on the physical channel.
  9. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息还包括:The method of claim 5, wherein the power headroom information further comprises:
    一个或多个第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一SRS包括的至少一个SRS中的一个SRS的标识信息,所述第一指示信息与所述第一功率余量信息关联。One or more first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate identification information of one SRS of the at least one SRS included in the first SRS, the first indication information and the first power headroom Information association.
  10. 根据5至9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息还包括:The method of any one of 5 to 9, wherein the power headroom information further comprises:
    所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率;和/或The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource; and/or
    所述终端设备发送所述第一SRS的第一最大发射功率;和/或Transmitting, by the terminal device, a first maximum transmit power of the first SRS; and/or
    所述终端设备在所述物理信道上的第一最大发射功率;和/或a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the physical channel; and/or
    所述终端设备的第一最大发射功率;和/或,The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device; and/or,
    第二指示信息,用于指示所述频域资源的标识信息。The second indication information is used to indicate the identifier information of the frequency domain resource.
  11. 一种无线通信的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method of wireless communication, comprising:
    接入网设备向终端设备发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置频域资源的至少一个侦听参考信号(SRS);The access network device sends the first configuration information to the terminal device, where the first configuration information is used to configure at least one listening reference signal (SRS) of the frequency domain resource;
    所述接入网设备确定所述频域资源的第一时间段上的第一SRS,所述第一SRS包括所述至少一个SRS中的一个或多个;Determining, by the access network device, a first SRS on a first time period of the frequency domain resource, where the first SRS includes one or more of the at least one SRS;
    所述接入网设备接收所述终端设备在所述第一时间段上发送的所述频域资源的功率余量信息,其中,所述功率余量信息是基于所述第一SRS和所述频域资源的所述第一时间段上的物理信道确定的。The access network device receives power headroom information of the frequency domain resource that is sent by the terminal device in the first time period, where the power headroom information is based on the first SRS and the The physical channel on the first time period of the frequency domain resource is determined.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述方法,其特征在于,所述物理信道包括物理上行共享信道和/或物理上行控制信道。The method of claim 11, wherein the physical channel comprises a physical uplink shared channel and/or a physical uplink control channel.
  13. 根据权利要求11或12任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括如下至少一项:The method according to any one of claims 11 or 12, wherein the first configuration information comprises at least one of the following:
    用于指示所述至少一个SRS的发送方式的指示信息,其中,所述发送方式包括:非周期性的发送方式,或半静态发送方式,或周期性的发送方式;And indication information for indicating a sending manner of the at least one SRS, where the sending manner includes: an aperiodic sending manner, or a semi-static sending manner, or a periodic sending manner;
    用于指示所述至少一个SRS的功能的指示信息,其中所述功能包括:用于基于码本(CodeBook)的传输,和/或用于基于非码本的传输,和/或用于SRS切换,和/或用于波束管理;Instructing information indicating a function of the at least one SRS, wherein the function comprises: for codebook based transmission, and/or for non-codebook based transmission, and/or for SRS handover And/or for beam management;
    所述至少一个SRS的时域位置信息;Time domain location information of the at least one SRS;
    所述至少一个SRS的标识信息;Identification information of the at least one SRS;
    所述频域资源的标识信息。Identification information of the frequency domain resource.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入网设备确定所述第一SRS,包括:The method according to claim 13, wherein the determining, by the access network device, the first SRS comprises:
    所述接入网设备根据所述至少一个SRS的发送方式,确定所述第一SRS;和/或,Determining, by the access network device, the first SRS according to a sending manner of the at least one SRS; and/or,
    所述接入网设备根据所述至少一个SRS的功能,确定所述第一SRS;和/或,Determining, by the access network device, the first SRS according to a function of the at least one SRS; and/or,
    所述接入网设备根据所述至少一个SRS在所述第一时间段中的时域位置,确定所述第一SRS;和/或,Determining, by the access network device, the first SRS according to a time domain location of the at least one SRS in the first time period; and/or,
    所述接入网设备根据所述至少一个SRS的标识信息,确定所述第一SRS;或者,Determining, by the access network device, the first SRS according to the identifier information of the at least one SRS; or
    所述第一SRS包括所述至少一个SRS中的所有SRS。The first SRS includes all SRSs in the at least one SRS.
  15. 根据11至14任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息包括:The method of any one of 11 to 14, wherein the power headroom information comprises:
    一个或多个第一功率余量信息,其中,所述第一功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述终端设备发送第二SRS的功率之差,所述第二SRS包括所述第一SRS包括的至少一个SRS中的一个;以及,One or more first power headroom information, wherein the first power headroom information is a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the second SRS sent by the terminal device Poor, the second SRS includes one of at least one SRS included in the first SRS; and
    一个或多个第二功率余量信息,其中,所述第二功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述终端设备在第一物理信道上的功率之差,且当所述物理信道包括多个信道时,所述第一物理信道为所述多个信道中的一个,当所述物理信道包括一个 信道时,所述第一物理信道为所述信道。One or more second power headroom information, wherein the second power headroom information is a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and the terminal device is on a first physical channel a difference in power, and when the physical channel includes a plurality of channels, the first physical channel is one of the plurality of channels, and when the physical channel includes a channel, the first physical channel is a Said channel.
  16. 根据11至15任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息包括:The method of any one of 11 to 15, wherein the power headroom information comprises:
    第三功率余量信息,其中,所述第三功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述终端设备发送所述第一SRS的功率之差;以及,a third power headroom information, wherein the third power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the first SRS sent by the terminal device; as well as,
    第四功率余量信息,其中,所述第四功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述终端设备在所述物理信道上的功率之差。And a fourth power headroom information, where the fourth power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the terminal device on the physical channel.
  17. 根据11至16任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息包括:The method of any one of 11 to 16, wherein the power headroom information comprises:
    第五功率余量信息,其中,所述第五功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与第一发射功率之差,其中,所述第一发射功率为所述终端设备发送所述第一SRS的功率与在所述物理信道上的功率之和。a fifth power headroom information, where the fifth power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device and the first transmit power of the frequency domain resource, where the first transmit power And transmitting, by the terminal device, a sum of power of the first SRS and power of the physical channel.
  18. 根据权利要求15至17任一项【-目的是,分开报PH-】所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 15 to 17, wherein the object is separately reported to PH-, characterized in that it further comprises:
    所述接入网设备向所述终端设备发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于指示:The access network device sends second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to indicate:
    所述接入网设备向所述终端设备分别发送物理信道和SRS的功率控制命令;或者The access network device separately sends a power control command of the physical channel and the SRS to the terminal device; or
    所述接入网设备向所述终端设备分别发送所述频域资源上的物理信道和所述频域资源上的SRS的功率控制命令;或者Transmitting, by the access network device, the physical channel on the frequency domain resource and the power control command of the SRS on the frequency domain resource to the terminal device; or
    所述终端设备用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率,其中,用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率与用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同。The second maximum transmit power used by the terminal device to transmit the SRS and the second maximum transmit power used on the physical channel, where the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS and the second for transmitting on the physical channel The maximum transmit power is different.
    所述终端设备用于在所述频域资源上发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在所述频域资源上的物理信道上的第二最大发射功率,其中,用于在所述频域资源上发送SRS的第二最大发射功率与用于在所述频域资源上的物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同。Transmitting, by the terminal device, a second maximum transmit power of the SRS and a second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource on the frequency domain resource, where The second maximum transmit power of the SRS transmitted on the domain resource is different than the second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource.
  19. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息还包括:The method according to claim 15, wherein the power headroom information further comprises:
    一个或多个第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一SRS包括的至少一个SRS中的一个SRS的标识信息,所述第一指示信息与所述第一功率余量信息关联。One or more first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate identification information of one SRS of the at least one SRS included in the first SRS, the first indication information and the first power headroom Information association.
  20. 根据15至19任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息还包括:The method of any one of 15 to 19, wherein the power headroom information further comprises:
    所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率;和/或The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource; and/or
    所述终端设备发送所述第一SRS的第一最大发射功率;和/或Transmitting, by the terminal device, a first maximum transmit power of the first SRS; and/or
    所述终端设备在所述物理信道上的第一最大发射功率;和/或a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the physical channel; and/or
    所述终端设备的第一最大发射功率;和/或,The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device; and/or,
    第二指示信息,用于指示所述频域资源的标识信息。The second indication information is used to indicate the identifier information of the frequency domain resource.
  21. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理器和与所述处理器耦合的收发器;a processor and a transceiver coupled to the processor;
    所述处理器,用于获得第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置频域资源的至少一个 侦听参考信号(SRS);The processor is configured to obtain first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure at least one listening reference signal (SRS) of a frequency domain resource;
    所述处理器,还用于根据所述第一配置信息确定所述频域资源的第一时间段上的第一SRS,所述第一SRS包括所述至少一个SRS中的一个或多个;The processor is further configured to determine, according to the first configuration information, a first SRS on a first time period of the frequency domain resource, where the first SRS includes one or more of the at least one SRS;
    所述处理器,还用于根据所述第一SRS和所述频域资源的所述第一时间段上的物理信道确定所述频域资源的功率余量信息;The processor is further configured to determine power headroom information of the frequency domain resource according to the physical channel on the first time period of the first SRS and the frequency domain resource;
    所述收发器,用于在所述第一时间段上发送所述功率余量信息。The transceiver is configured to send the power headroom information on the first time period.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的装置,其特征在于,所述物理信道包括物理上行共享信道和/或物理上行控制信道。The apparatus according to claim 21, wherein the physical channel comprises a physical uplink shared channel and/or a physical uplink control channel.
  23. 根据权利要求21或22任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括如下至少一项:The apparatus according to any one of claims 21 or 22, wherein the first configuration information comprises at least one of the following:
    用于指示所述至少一个SRS的发送方式的指示信息,其中,所述发送方式包括:非周期性的发送方式,或半静态发送方式,或周期性的发送方式;And indication information for indicating a sending manner of the at least one SRS, where the sending manner includes: an aperiodic sending manner, or a semi-static sending manner, or a periodic sending manner;
    用于指示所述至少一个SRS的功能的指示信息,其中所述功能包括:用于基于码本(CodeBook)的传输,和/或用于基于非码本的传输,和/或用于SRS切换,和/或用于波束管理;Instructing information indicating a function of the at least one SRS, wherein the function comprises: for codebook based transmission, and/or for non-codebook based transmission, and/or for SRS handover And/or for beam management;
    所述至少一个SRS的时域位置信息;Time domain location information of the at least one SRS;
    所述至少一个SRS的标识信息;Identification information of the at least one SRS;
    所述频域资源的标识信息。Identification information of the frequency domain resource.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的装置,其特征在于,所述根据所述第一配置信息确定所述第一SRS,包括:The device according to claim 23, wherein the determining the first SRS according to the first configuration information comprises:
    所述处理器,用于根据所述至少一个SRS的发送方式,确定所述第一SRS;和/或,The processor, configured to determine the first SRS according to a sending manner of the at least one SRS; and/or,
    所述处理器,用于根据所述至少一个SRS的功能,确定所述第一SRS;和/或,The processor, configured to determine the first SRS according to a function of the at least one SRS; and/or,
    所述处理器,用于根据所述至少一个SRS在所述第一时间段中的时域位置,确定所述第一SRS;和/或,The processor, configured to determine the first SRS according to a time domain location of the at least one SRS in the first time period; and/or,
    所述处理器,用于根据所述至少一个SRS的标识信息,确定所述第一SRS;或者,The processor is configured to determine the first SRS according to the identifier information of the at least one SRS; or
    所述第一SRS包括所述至少一个SRS中的所有SRS。The first SRS includes all SRSs in the at least one SRS.
  25. 根据21至24任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息包括:The device of any one of 21 to 24, wherein the power headroom information comprises:
    一个或多个第一功率余量信息,其中,所述第一功率余量信息为所述装置在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述装置发送第二SRS的功率之差,所述第二SRS包括所述第一SRS包括的至少一个SRS中的一个;以及,One or more first power headroom information, wherein the first power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the apparatus in the frequency domain resource and a power of the second SRS sent by the apparatus, The second SRS includes one of at least one SRS included in the first SRS;
    一个或多个第二功率余量信息,其中,所述第二功率余量信息为所述装置在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述装置在第一物理信道上的功率之差,且当所述物理信道包括多个信道时,所述第一物理信道为所述多个信道中的一个,当所述物理信道包括一个信道时,所述第一物理信道为所述信道。One or more second power headroom information, wherein the second power headroom information is a first maximum transmit power of the device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the device on a first physical channel Poor, and when the physical channel includes multiple channels, the first physical channel is one of the multiple channels, and when the physical channel includes one channel, the first physical channel is the channel .
  26. 根据21至25任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息包括:The device of any one of 21 to 25, wherein the power headroom information comprises:
    第三功率余量信息,其中,所述第三功率余量信息为所述装置在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述装置发送所述第一SRS的功率之差;以及,a third power headroom information, wherein the third power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the apparatus in the frequency domain resource and a power of the apparatus to send the first SRS;
    第四功率余量信息,其中,所述第四功率余量信息为所述装置在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述装置在所述物理信道上的功率之差。And a fourth power headroom information, wherein the fourth power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the device on the physical channel.
  27. 根据21至26任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息包括:The device of any one of 21 to 26, wherein the power headroom information comprises:
    第五功率余量信息,其中,所述第五功率余量信息为所述装置在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与第一发射功率之差,其中,所述第一发射功率为所述装置发送所述第一SRS的功率与在所述物理信道上的功率之和。a fifth power headroom information, where the fifth power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the device and the first transmit power of the frequency domain resource, where the first transmit power is The apparatus transmits a sum of power of the first SRS and power on the physical channel.
  28. 根据权利要求25至27任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,还包括:The device according to any one of claims 25 to 27, further comprising:
    所述处理器,用于获得第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于指示:The processor is configured to obtain second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used to indicate:
    所述装置分别接收物理信道和SRS的功率控制命令;或者The device receives power control commands for the physical channel and the SRS, respectively; or
    所述装置分别接收所述频域资源上的物理信道和所述频域资源上的SRS的功率控制命令;或者The device respectively receives a physical channel on the frequency domain resource and a power control command of an SRS on the frequency domain resource; or
    所述装置用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率,其中,用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率与用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同。The apparatus is configured to transmit a second maximum transmit power of the SRS and a second maximum transmit power for use on the physical channel, wherein the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS and the second maximum for the physical channel The transmission power is different.
    所述装置用于在所述频域资源上发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在所述频域资源上的物理信道上的第二最大发射功率,其中,用于在所述频域资源上发送SRS的第二最大发射功率与用于在所述频域资源上的物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同。The apparatus is configured to transmit, on the frequency domain resource, a second maximum transmit power of an SRS and a second maximum transmit power on a physical channel on the frequency domain resource, where The second maximum transmit power of the SRS transmitted on the resource is different from the second maximum transmit power used on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource.
  29. 根据权利要求25所述的装置,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息还包括:The device according to claim 25, wherein the power headroom information further comprises:
    一个或多个第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一SRS包括的至少一个SRS中的一个SRS的标识信息,所述第一指示信息与所述第一功率余量信息关联。One or more first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate identification information of one SRS of the at least one SRS included in the first SRS, the first indication information and the first power headroom Information association.
  30. 根据25至29任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息还包括:The device of any one of 25 to 29, wherein the power headroom information further comprises:
    所述装置在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率;和/或The first maximum transmit power of the device in the frequency domain resource; and/or
    所述装置发送所述第一SRS的第一最大发射功率;和/或Transmitting, by the apparatus, a first maximum transmit power of the first SRS; and/or
    所述装置在所述物理信道上的第一最大发射功率;和/或a first maximum transmit power of the apparatus on the physical channel; and/or
    所述装置的第一最大发射功率;和/或,The first maximum transmit power of the device; and/or,
    第二指示信息,用于指示所述频域资源的标识信息。The second indication information is used to indicate the identifier information of the frequency domain resource.
  31. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理器和与所述处理器耦合的收发器;a processor and a transceiver coupled to the processor;
    所述收发器,用于向终端设备发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置频域资源的至少一个侦听参考信号(SRS);The transceiver is configured to send first configuration information to the terminal device, where the first configuration information is used to configure at least one listening reference signal (SRS) of the frequency domain resource;
    所述处理器,用于确定所述频域资源的第一时间段上的第一SRS,所述第一SRS包括所述 至少一个SRS中的一个或多个;The processor is configured to determine a first SRS on a first time period of the frequency domain resource, where the first SRS includes one or more of the at least one SRS;
    所述收发器,还用于接收所述终端设备在所述第一时间段上发送的所述频域资源的功率余量信息,其中,所述功率余量信息是基于所述第一SRS和所述频域资源的所述第一时间段上的物理信道确定的。The transceiver is further configured to receive power headroom information of the frequency domain resource that is sent by the terminal device on the first time period, where the power headroom information is based on the first SRS and The physical channel on the first time period of the frequency domain resource is determined.
  32. 根据权利要求31所述装置,其特征在于,所述物理信道包括物理上行共享信道和/或物理上行控制信道。The apparatus of claim 31, wherein the physical channel comprises a physical uplink shared channel and/or a physical uplink control channel.
  33. 根据权利要求31或32任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括如下至少一项:The apparatus according to any one of claims 31 or 32, wherein the first configuration information comprises at least one of the following:
    用于指示所述至少一个SRS的发送方式的指示信息,其中,所述发送方式包括:非周期性的发送方式,或半静态发送方式,或周期性的发送方式;And indication information for indicating a sending manner of the at least one SRS, where the sending manner includes: an aperiodic sending manner, or a semi-static sending manner, or a periodic sending manner;
    用于指示所述至少一个SRS的功能的指示信息,其中所述功能包括:用于基于码本(CodeBook)的传输,和/或用于基于非码本的传输,和/或用于SRS切换,和/或用于波束管理;Instructing information indicating a function of the at least one SRS, wherein the function comprises: for codebook based transmission, and/or for non-codebook based transmission, and/or for SRS handover And/or for beam management;
    所述至少一个SRS的时域位置信息;Time domain location information of the at least one SRS;
    所述至少一个SRS的标识信息;Identification information of the at least one SRS;
    所述频域资源的标识信息。Identification information of the frequency domain resource.
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的装置,其特征在于,所述确定所述第一SRS,包括:The apparatus according to claim 33, wherein said determining said first SRS comprises:
    所述处理器,用于根据所述至少一个SRS的发送方式,确定所述第一SRS;和/或,The processor, configured to determine the first SRS according to a sending manner of the at least one SRS; and/or,
    所述处理器,用于根据所述至少一个SRS的功能,确定所述第一SRS;和/或,The processor, configured to determine the first SRS according to a function of the at least one SRS; and/or,
    所述处理器,用于根据所述至少一个SRS在所述第一时间段中的时域位置,确定所述第一SRS;和/或,The processor, configured to determine the first SRS according to a time domain location of the at least one SRS in the first time period; and/or,
    所述处理器,用于根据所述至少一个SRS的标识信息,确定所述第一SRS;或者,The processor is configured to determine the first SRS according to the identifier information of the at least one SRS; or
    所述第一SRS包括所述至少一个SRS中的所有SRS。The first SRS includes all SRSs in the at least one SRS.
  35. 根据31至34任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息包括:The device of any one of 31 to 34, wherein the power headroom information comprises:
    一个或多个第一功率余量信息,其中,所述第一功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的最第一大发射功率与所述终端设备发送第二SRS的功率之差,所述第二SRS包括所述第一SRS包括的至少一个SRS中的一个;以及,One or more first power headroom information, wherein the first power headroom information is a power of the terminal device transmitting the second SRS at the first largest transmission power of the frequency domain resource and the terminal device a difference that the second SRS includes one of the at least one SRS included in the first SRS;
    一个或多个第二功率余量信息,其中,所述第二功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述终端设备在第一物理信道上的功率之差,且当所述物理信道包括多个信道时,所述第一物理信道为所述多个信道中的一个,当所述物理信道包括一个信道时,所述第一物理信道为所述信道。One or more second power headroom information, wherein the second power headroom information is a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and the terminal device is on a first physical channel a difference in power, and when the physical channel includes a plurality of channels, the first physical channel is one of the plurality of channels, and when the physical channel includes a channel, the first physical channel is a Said channel.
  36. 根据31至35任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息包括:The device of any one of 31 to 35, wherein the power headroom information comprises:
    第三功率余量信息,其中,所述第三功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述终端设备发送所述第一SRS的功率之差;以及,a third power headroom information, wherein the third power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the first SRS sent by the terminal device; as well as,
    第四功率余量信息,其中,所述第四功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与所述终端设备在所述物理信道上的功率之差。And a fourth power headroom information, where the fourth power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource and a power of the terminal device on the physical channel.
  37. 根据31至36任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息包括:The device of any one of 31 to 36, wherein the power headroom information comprises:
    第五功率余量信息,其中,所述第五功率余量信息为所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率与第一发射功率之差,其中,所述第一发射功率为所述终端设备发送所述第一SRS的功率与在所述物理信道上的功率之和。a fifth power headroom information, where the fifth power headroom information is a difference between a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device and the first transmit power of the frequency domain resource, where the first transmit power And transmitting, by the terminal device, a sum of power of the first SRS and power of the physical channel.
  38. 根据权利要求35至37任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,还包括:The device according to any one of claims 35 to 37, further comprising:
    所述收发器,用于向所述终端设备发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于指示:The transceiver is configured to send second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to indicate:
    所述收发器向所述终端设备分别发送物理信道和SRS的功率控制命令;或者Transmitting, by the transceiver, a power control command of a physical channel and an SRS to the terminal device; or
    所述收发器向所述终端设备分别发送所述频域资源上的物理信道和所述频域资源上的SRS的功率控制命令;或者Transmitting, by the transceiver, the physical channel on the frequency domain resource and the power control command of the SRS on the frequency domain resource to the terminal device; or
    所述终端设备用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率,其中,用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率与用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同;或者The second maximum transmit power used by the terminal device to transmit the SRS and the second maximum transmit power used on the physical channel, where the second maximum transmit power for transmitting the SRS and the second for transmitting on the physical channel Maximum transmit power is different; or
    所述终端设备用于在所述频域资源上发送SRS的第二最大发射功率和用于在所述频域资源上的物理信道上的第二最大发射功率,其中,用于发送SRS的第二最大发射功率与用于在物理信道上的第二最大发射功率不同。Transmitting, by the terminal device, a second maximum transmit power of the SRS and a second maximum transmit power on the physical channel on the frequency domain resource, where the terminal device is configured to send the SRS The two maximum transmit powers are different from the second maximum transmit power used on the physical channel.
  39. 根据权利要求35所述的装置,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息还包括:The device according to claim 35, wherein the power headroom information further comprises:
    一个或多个第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一SRS包括的至少一个SRS中的一个SRS的标识信息,所述第一指示信息与所述第一功率余量信息关联。One or more first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate identification information of one SRS of the at least one SRS included in the first SRS, the first indication information and the first power headroom Information association.
  40. 根据35至39任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述功率余量信息还包括:The device of any one of 35 to 39, wherein the power headroom information further comprises:
    所述终端设备在所述频域资源的第一最大发射功率;和/或The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device in the frequency domain resource; and/or
    所述终端设备发送所述第一SRS的第一最大发射功率;和/或Transmitting, by the terminal device, a first maximum transmit power of the first SRS; and/or
    所述终端设备在所述物理信道上的第一最大发射功率;和/或a first maximum transmit power of the terminal device on the physical channel; and/or
    所述终端设备的第一最大发射功率;和/或,The first maximum transmit power of the terminal device; and/or,
    第二指示信息,用于指示所述频域资源的标识信息。The second indication information is used to indicate the identifier information of the frequency domain resource.
  41. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理器和与所述处理器耦合的存储器;a processor and a memory coupled to the processor;
    所述存储器用于存储指令;The memory is for storing instructions;
    所述处理器用于读取并执行所述存储器中的所述指令,使得所述通信装置执行权利要求1至20中任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to read and execute the instructions in the memory such that the communication device performs the method of any one of claims 1-20.
  42. 一种处理器可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括指令,当所述指令在处理器上运行时,使得所述处理器执行权利要求1至20任一项所述的方法。A processor readable storage medium, comprising instructions that, when executed on a processor, cause the processor to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 20.
PCT/CN2019/078262 2018-04-04 2019-03-15 Wireless communication method and device WO2019192308A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810300482.0A CN110351822B (en) 2018-04-04 2018-04-04 Method and apparatus for wireless communication
CN201810300482.0 2018-04-04

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019192308A1 true WO2019192308A1 (en) 2019-10-10

Family

ID=68099927

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/078262 WO2019192308A1 (en) 2018-04-04 2019-03-15 Wireless communication method and device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN110351822B (en)
WO (1) WO2019192308A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022199534A1 (en) * 2021-03-24 2022-09-29 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Non-terrestrial network power control method and apparatus, device, and readable storage medium

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112867129B (en) * 2019-11-08 2023-08-11 荣耀终端有限公司 Method and device for reporting and sending power headroom
CN114270955B (en) * 2019-11-08 2024-03-12 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Communication method and device
CN113473516B (en) * 2020-03-31 2023-05-02 维沃移动通信有限公司 Method for transmitting power headroom, terminal equipment and network equipment
US20230209479A1 (en) * 2020-07-06 2023-06-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Power headroom report triggering by dormant bandwidth part switching

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103813430A (en) * 2012-11-05 2014-05-21 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Power report method and device in carrier aggregation system
US20140219234A1 (en) * 2011-10-04 2014-08-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for transmitting power headroom report, and apparatus for same
CN107690157A (en) * 2016-08-04 2018-02-13 北京信威通信技术股份有限公司 A kind of method and device of reporting power margin

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101848538B (en) * 2009-03-26 2012-11-21 电信科学技术研究院 Method and equipment for determining SRS transmission bandwidth
CN105723781A (en) * 2014-01-24 2016-06-29 Lg电子株式会社 Method for controlling transmission power of sounding reference signal on special subframe in TDD-type wireless communication system and device therefor
CN105472745B (en) * 2014-09-04 2020-09-08 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 Method and equipment for allocating sounding pilot signal resources

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20140219234A1 (en) * 2011-10-04 2014-08-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for transmitting power headroom report, and apparatus for same
CN103813430A (en) * 2012-11-05 2014-05-21 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Power report method and device in carrier aggregation system
CN107690157A (en) * 2016-08-04 2018-02-13 北京信威通信技术股份有限公司 A kind of method and device of reporting power margin

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
SAMSUNG: "Support of Type 2 PH in NR", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 NR AD HOC R2-1800614, 11 January 2018 (2018-01-11), XP051385790 *

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022199534A1 (en) * 2021-03-24 2022-09-29 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Non-terrestrial network power control method and apparatus, device, and readable storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110351822A (en) 2019-10-18
CN110351822B (en) 2021-09-21

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3576452B1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus for power headroom reporting in a multi-numerology or multi-beam scenario
WO2019192308A1 (en) Wireless communication method and device
US20200344699A1 (en) Uplink Information Transmission Method and Apparatus
US20210288852A1 (en) Guard band indication method and apparatus
JP5227938B2 (en) User device and mobile communication method
CN110891312B (en) Information sending method, information receiving method and device
EP2930969B1 (en) Method for determining the number of bits of rank indicator (ri), base station, and terminal
CN106550445B (en) Method and apparatus for low latency in wireless communications
US11528731B2 (en) Communication method and communications apparatus
CA3021856A1 (en) A radio network node, a wireless device and methods therein for reference signal configuration
WO2021030980A1 (en) Communication method, communication apparatus, and system
JP2023076769A (en) Signal transmitting/receiving method, device, and system
CN111586708A (en) Method, device and system for transmitting sounding reference signal
WO2019096253A1 (en) Uplink data transmission method, terminal device and base station
WO2021031048A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN114845405B (en) Information reporting method and device
CN115136523A (en) Method and device for determining feedback resources
WO2022253150A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus
CN114451017A (en) Method and device for activating and releasing non-dynamic scheduling transmission
EP4195567A1 (en) Signal transmission method and apparatus, and storage medium
CN116076099A (en) User equipment, base station and method for multi-panel/TRP PUSCH transmission
WO2020143713A9 (en) Communication method and device, and storage medium
CN111385865B (en) Random access method, device, system and storage medium
CN115299146A (en) User equipment, base station and method for multi-beam/panel PUSCH transmission
US20230403687A1 (en) Communication Method and Apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19780745

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19780745

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1